初一至初三全程英语知识点总结及练习学习啊

第一篇：初一至初三全程英语知识点总结及练习学习啊

学英语简单吗？肯定会有许多学生说：“难死了”。

为什么有好多学生对英语的学习都感到头疼呢？答案只有一个：“不得法。” 英语与汉语一样都是一种语言，为什么你说汉语会如此流利？那是因为你置身于一个汉语环境中，如果你在伦敦呆上半年，保准说起英语来会非常流利。但很多中学生没有很好的英语环境，那么你可以自己设置一个英语环境，坚持“多说”、“多听”、“多读”、“多写”，那么你的英语成绩肯定会很出色。

一、多“说”。

自己多创造机会与英语教师多讲英语，见了同学，尤其是和好朋友在一起时尽量用英语去问候，谈心情……这时候你需随身携带一个英汉互译小词典，遇到生词时查一下这些生词，也不用刻意去记，用的多了，这个单词自然而然就会记住。千万别把学英语当成负担，始终把它当成一件有趣的事情去做。

或许你有机会碰上外国人，你应大胆地上去跟他打招呼，和他谈天气、谈风景、谈学校……只是别问及他的年纪，婚史等私人问题。尽量用一些你学过的词汇，句子去和他谈天说地。不久你会发现与老外聊天要比你与中国人谈英语容易的多。因为他和你交谈时会用许多简单词汇，而且不太看重说法，你只要发音准确，准能顺利地交流下去。只是你必须要有信心，敢于表达自己的思想。

如果没有合适的伙伴也没关系，你可以拿过一本书或其它什么东西做假想对象，对它谈你一天的所见所闻，谈你的快乐，你的悲伤等等，长此坚持下去你的口语肯定会有较大的提高。

二、多“听”

寻找一切可以听英语的机会。别人用英语交谈时，你应该大胆地去参与，多听听各种各样人的发音，男女老少，节奏快的慢的你都应该接触到，如果这样的机会少的话，你可以选择你不知内容的文章去听，这将会对你帮助很大，而你去听学过的课文的磁带，那将会对你的语言语调的学习有很大的帮助。

三、多“读”。

“读”可以分为两种。一种是“默读”。每天给予一定时间的练习将会对你提高阅读速度有很大的好处，读的内容可以是你的课本，但最好是一些有趣的小读物，因为现在的英语高考越来越重视阅读量和阅读速度。每道题的得分都与你的理解程度有很大关系，所以经过高中三年阅读的训练后，你必定会在高考中胜券在握。另一种是“朗读”这是学语言必不可少的一种学习途径。

四、多“写”

有的同学总是抱怨时间紧，根本没时间写作文。其实“写”的形式很多，不一定就写作文才提高写作能力。比如写下你一天中发生的一些重要的事情，或当天学了某一个词组，你可以创设一个语境恰如其份地用上这个词。这样即可帮你记住这个词的用法，又可以锻炼你的写作能力，比如学“wish”一词时，可写一小段如下：

The teacher often asks us what we want to be in the future.My good friend Tom wishes to be a soldier.However,I'm different.I wish I were a teacher in the future.But my mother wishes me to be a doctor.只几句话：但wish的几种用法已跃然纸上，这样写下来印象会深刻得多，这样比死记硬背wish的用法也有趣轻松的多。

学习英语不用花大块的时间，10分钟的散步可以练“说”,吃完饭后可以读一会儿英语小说，睡前听几分钟英语，可以使你得到更好地休息……只要你每天抽出一些时间来练英语，你的英语成绩肯定会很快提高的。

背英语单词技巧

1、循环记忆法

艾宾浩斯遗忘曲线

人的大脑是一个记忆的宝库，人脑经历过的事物，思考过的问题，体验过的情感和情绪，练习过的动作，都可以成为人们记忆的内容。例如英文的学习中单词、短语和句子，甚至文章的内容都是通过记忆完成的。从“记”到“忆”是有个过程的，这其中包括了识记、保持、再认和回忆。有很多 人在学习英语的过程中，只注重了学习当时的记忆效果，孰不知，要想做好学习的记忆工作，是要下一番工夫的，单纯的注重当时的记忆效果，而忽视了后期的保持和再认同样是达不到良好的效果的。

在信息的处理上，记忆是对输入信息的编码、贮存和提取的过程，从信息处理的角度上，英文的第一次学习和背诵只是一个输入编码的过程。人的记忆的能力从生理上讲是十分惊人的，它可以存贮1015比特(byte，字节)的信息，可是每个人的记忆宝库被挖掘的只占10%，还有更多的记忆发挥空间。这是因为，有些人只关注了记忆的当时效果，却忽视了记忆中的更大的问题--即记忆的牢固度问题，那就牵涉到心理学中常说的关于记忆遗忘的规律。

一、艾宾浩斯记忆规律曲线解释

德国有一位著名的心理学家名叫艾宾浩斯(Hermann Ebbinghaus，1850-1909)，他在1885年发表了他的实验报告后，记忆研究就成了心理学中被研究最多的领域之一，而艾宾浩斯正是发现记忆遗忘规律的第一人。

根据我们所知道的，记忆的保持在时间上是不同的，有短时的记忆和长时的记忆两种。而我们平时的记忆的过程是这样的：

输入的信息在经过人的注意过程的学习后，便成为了人的短时的记忆，但是如果不经过及时的复习，这些记住过的东西就会遗忘，而经过了及时的复习，这些短时的记忆就会成为了人的一种长时的记忆，从而在大脑中保持着很长的时间。那么，对于我们来讲，怎样才叫做遗忘呢，所谓遗忘就是我们对于曾经记忆过的东西不能再认起来，也不能回忆起来，或者是错误的再认和错误的回忆，这些都是遗忘。艾宾浩斯在做这个实验的时候是拿自己作为测试对象的，他得出了一些关于记忆的结论。他选用了一些根本没有意义的音节，也就是那些不能拼出单词来的众多字母的组合，比如asww，cfhhj，ijikmb，rfyjbc等等。他经过对自己的测试，得到了一些数据。

然后，艾宾浩斯又根据了这些点描绘出了一条曲线，这就是非常有名的揭示遗忘规律的曲线：艾宾浩斯遗忘曲线，图中竖轴表示学习中记住的知识数量，横轴表示时间(天数)，曲线表示记忆量变化的规律。

这条曲线告诉人们在学习中的遗忘是有规律的，遗忘的进程不是均衡的，不是固定的一天丢掉几个，转天又丢几个的，而是在记忆的最初阶段遗忘的速度很快，后来就逐渐减慢了，到了相当长的时候后，几乎就不再遗忘了，这就是遗忘的发展规律，即“先快后慢”的原则。观察这条遗忘曲线，你会发现,学得的知识在一天后，如不抓紧复习,就只剩下原来的25%)。随着时间的推移,遗忘的速度减慢，遗忘的数量也就减少。有人做过一个实验，两组学生学习一段课文，甲组在学习后不久进行一次复习，乙组不予复习，一天后甲组保持98%，乙组保持56%；一周后甲组保持83%，乙组保持33%。乙组的遗忘平均值比甲组高。

二、不同性质材料有不同的遗忘曲线

而且，艾宾浩斯还在关于记忆的实验中发现，记住12个无意义音节，平均需要重复16.5次；为了记住36个无意义章节，需重复54次；而记忆六首诗中的480个音节，平均只需要重复8次！这个实验告诉我们，凡是理解了的知识，就能记得迅速、全面而牢固。不然，愣是死记硬背，那也是费力不讨好的。因此，比较容易记忆的是那些有意义的材料，而那些无意义的材料在记忆的时候比较费力气，在以后回忆起来的时候也很不轻松。因此，艾宾浩斯遗忘曲线是关于遗忘的一种曲线，而且是对无意义的音节而言，对于与其他材料的对比，艾宾浩斯又得出了不同性质材料的不同遗忘曲线，不过他们大体上都是一致的。

因此，艾宾浩斯的实验向我们充分证实了一个道理，学习要勤于复习，而且记忆的理解效果越好，遗忘的也越慢。

三、不同的人有不同的艾宾浩斯记忆曲线--个性化的艾宾浩斯

上述的艾宾浩斯记忆曲线是艾宾浩斯在实验室中经过了大量测试后，产生了不同的记忆数据，从而生成的一种曲线，是一个具有共性的群体规律。此记忆曲线并不考虑接受试验个人的个性特点，而是寻求一种处于平衡点的记忆规律。

但是记忆规律可以具体到我们每个人，因为我们的生理特点、生活经历不同，可能导致我们有不同的记忆习惯、记忆方式、记忆特点。规律对于自然人改造世界的行为，只能起一个催化的作用，如果与每个人的记忆特点相吻合，那么就如顺水扬帆，一日千里；如果与个人记忆特点相悖，记忆效果则会大打折扣。因此，我们要根据每个人的不同特点，寻找到属于自己的艾宾浩斯记忆曲线

2》如何学英语

下定决心，坚持不懈

英语学习作为一门语言技能，通过大量的训练和练习任何人是可以掌握的。一般地说，英语学习的原则是听、说领先，读、写跟上。李扬的疯狂英语提倡，首先建立起我能学好英语的信心，然后以句子为单位，大量地模仿，疯狂地操练，大声地朗读，最后达到自如地说英语，他的方法对提高说英语的能力很奏效。钟道隆教授45岁开始学英语，一年后，学成出国当口语翻译，并创造了逆苦恼、逆急于求成、逆速成的逆向学习英语的方法。他还提出学习英语要遵循听、写、说、背、想的方法，他的方法强调以听为主，并且把所听到的内容全部写下来。尤其是他的学习精神最可佳，他学习英语用坏了十几台录音机，你可想象他听了多少英语；用完的圆珠笔芯几乎装满了一个一拉罐，你可想象他写了多少，在一年半内，累计业余学习英语时间大约三千小时，也就说每天抽出几个小时来学英语。如果我们做到他那样，一定也能学好英语。最重要的是坚持，只要能下定决心，坚持每天至少一个小时的学习英语，战胜自我最后肯定会有收获的。

注意方法，循序渐进 决心下定，还注意学习方法，有时根据自己的情况和不同的学习目的，选择不同的学习方法，但是学习英语一定要踏踏实实地、一步一个脚印地走。要把基础知识掌握好，也就是说，发音要正确、基本词汇要掌握牢、基本句式要熟练、基本语法要会用。

（1）要过好语音关。把每一个音标发正确，注意改正有问题的音素，特别是那些容易混淆的音素，尽早地掌握国际音标，并尽量的掌握一些读音规则，尽快地能利用读音规则来拼单词，掌握读音规则对单词的记忆和拼写非常有用。

（2）掌握一定数量的英语单词。对于学习者来说掌握英语词汇是一难关，学习单词要从单词的形、音、义这三方面去掌握，要注意单词的一词多义，一词多类的用法，要学会一些构词法的知识，来扩展词汇量。学习单词要在语言材料中去学，要结合词组，通过句子，阅读文章来活记单词，死记的单词是记不牢的。坚持在读、说前，先反复听，听的时候反应单词、句子的意思和节奏，想一下单词的拼法、句子结构。并要同学习语法规则有机结合起来进行。

（3）掌握好基本语法。语法在学习英语中也很重要，它能帮助我们把握住英语的基本规律，通过例句或语言现象把死的语法规则要记住，活的规则要通过做大量的练习掌握。总之学习英语要通过听、说、读、写、译来进行操练，不但要注意数量，更重要的是要注意质量，尤其是基本知识要掌握的准确，熟练。只有经过大量的实践，才能做到熟能生巧，运用自如。

提前预习，有的放矢

作为学生，在每次上课前，都要对要学的课文提前预习。首先在音标的帮助下试着拼读单词，也可以借助配套磁带反复听，对比一下，把握不准的要标出来，注意上课老师的发音，还要记一下单词的汉语意思和词性。借助课文的注释或辅导材料，预习一遍课文，找出不明白的地方，做到心中有数，在教师讲课时注意听这些地方。总之，预习的目的是熟悉要学的内容，找出不明白的地方，带着问题听课，做到有的放矢。

认真听课，积极配合

课堂是老师与学生一起学习、掌握、运用知识的主要场所。作为起主导作用的老师一方引导学生搞好课堂教学是很必要的，但也需要学习者的积极配合。上课要专心听讲、作好笔记、认真操练、积极思考。预习时出现的问题在课堂上教师没有讲到的，要向老师提出，把问题搞清楚，老师讲授的问题，先注意听，下课后整理一下笔记，反复思考一下这些问题，抓住老师所讲的重点，难点和考点。总之，上课时要做到耳听、眼观、嘴动、脑想，调动起多个感官来。

完成作业，找出问题

学完每一课，要认真完成课后作业。做作业时一定不要看参考书上题的答案，做完后再对答案，对于作业中所出现的不明白的问题，应该记下来，等下次上课时提出来。做作业是英语学习的很重要的环节，它是消化知识和巩固知识的过程，一定要认真完成规定的作业，笔头作业要动一动笔，口头作业要动一动嘴，提高听力要练一练耳，课文在听和读的基础上，最好背诵某些精彩段落。总之，要做大量的练习，英语是练出来的，一定不要偷懒。

及时复习，巩固知识

学会了的东西随着时间的流逝会逐渐遗忘，但学语言有遗忘现象是正常的。更不必因为有遗忘现象而影响自己学好英语的信心与决心。问题在于怎样来减轻遗忘的程度。善于类比，总结知识，把新学的知识同过去学的有关的知识进行横向和纵向比较和联系。建立错误档案记录，加深印象，以避免再反同样错误。我们大部分知识和技能是靠重复获得的，及时复习对于记忆非常必要，学英语就是要坚持天天不断的练，不断地重复基本句型，常用词汇和基本语法等。学习英语的过程也是同遗忘做斗争的过程。

总而言之，只要你能做到下定决心学，注意学习方法，把课前预习，认真听课，完成作业，及时复习这些环节作好了，你一定能够学好英语

初一至初三全程英语知识点总结及练习初一年级（上）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.Sit down 2.on duty 3.in English 4.have a seat 5.at home 6.look like 7.look at 8.have a look 9.come on 10.at work 11.at school 12.put on 13.look after 14.get up 15.go shopping

II.重要句型

1.help sb.do sth.2.What about…? 3.Let’s do sth.4.It’s time to do sth.5.It’s time for …

6.What’s…? It is…/ It’s… 7.Where is…? It’s….8.How old are you? I’m….9.What class are you in? I’m in….10.Welcome to….11.What’s …plus…? It’s….12.I think…

13.Who’s this? This is….14.What can you see？ I can see„.15.There is(are)….16.What colour is it(are they)? It’s(They’re)… 17.Whose …is this? It’s….18.What time is it? It’s….III.交际用语

1.Good morning, Miss/Mr….2.Hello!Hi!3.Nice to meet you.Nice to meet you, too.4.How are you? I’m fine, thank you/thanks.And you? 5.See you.See you later.6.Thank you!You’re welcome.7.Goodbye!Bye!8.What’s your name? My name is ….9.Here you are.This way, please.10.Who’s on duty today? 11.Let’s do.12.Let me see.IV.重要语法

1.动词be的用法；

2.人称代词和物主代词的用法； 3.名词的单复数和所有格的用法； 4.冠词的基本用法； 5.There be句型的用法。【名师讲解】 1.in/on

在表示空间位置时，in表示在某个空间的范围以内，on表示在某一个物体的表面之上。例如：There is a bird in the tree.树上有只鸟。There is a picture on the wall.墙上有张图。2.this/that/these/those(1)this常常用来指在时间、地点上更接近讲话人的人和事，these是this的复数形式。that常常用来指在时间、地点上离讲话人更远一点的人和事，those时that的复数形式。例如：You look in this box and I’ll look in that one over there.你看看这个盒子，我去看那边的那个盒子。

I want this car, not that car.我想要这辆小汽车，不是那一辆。Take these books to his room, please.请把这些书拿到他房间去。This is mine;that’s yours.这个是我的，那个是你的。

These are apples;those are oranges.这些是苹果，那些是橘子。

(2)在打电话的用语中，this常常指的是我，that常常指的是对方。例如： This is Mary speaking.Who’s that? 我是玛丽。你是谁？ 3.There be/ have There be “有”，其确切含意为“某处或某时存在某人或某物。”其结构是：There be + 某人或某物 + 表示地点或时间的状语。There be 后面的名词实际上是主语，be 动词的形式要和主语在数上保持一致，be动词后面的名词是单数或不可数名词时用is，名词是复数时用are。例如：(1)There is a big bottle of coke on the table.桌上有一大瓶子可乐。(2)There is a doll in the box.那个盒子里有个娃娃。

(3)There are many apples on the tree.那树上有许多苹果。

总之，There be结构强调的是一种客观存在的“有”。have表示“拥有，占有，具有”，即：某人有某物(sb.have / has sth.)。主语一般是名词或代词，与主语是所属关系。例如：(4)I have two brothers and one sister.我有两个兄弟，一个姐姐。(5)That house has four rooms.那所房子有四个房间。4.look/ see/ watch

(1)look 表示“看、瞧”，着重指认真看，强调看的动作，表示有意识地注意看，但不一定看到，以提醒对方注意。，如：

Look!The children are playing computer games.瞧！孩子们在玩电脑游戏。Look!What’s that over there? 看！那边那个是什么？

单独使用是不及物动词，如强调看某人/物，其后接介词at，才能带宾语，如： He’s looking at me。他正在看着我。

(2)see强调“看”的结果，着重的是look这个动作的结果，意思是“看到”，see是及物动词，后面能直接跟宾语。如：

What can you see in the picture? 你能在图上看到什么？

Look at the blackboard.What did you see on it?看黑板！你看到了什么？(3)watch“观看，注视”，侧重于场面，表示全神贯注地观看、观察或注视某事务的活动，强调过程，常用于“看电视、看足球、看演出”等。如：

Yesterday we watched a football match on TV.昨天我们从电视上看了一场足球比赛。4.put on/ / in

put on意为“穿上，戴上”。主要指“穿上”这一动作, 后面接表示服装、鞋帽的名词。in 是介词，表示“穿着”强调状态。在句中可以做定语、标语和状语。如： It’s cold outside, put on your coat.外面冷，穿上你的外衣。He puts on his hat and goes out.他戴上帽子，走了出去。

The woman in a white blouse is John’s mother.穿白色衬衣的那个妇女是John的妈妈。5.house/ home/family house ：“房子”，指居住的建筑物;Home: “家”，指一个人同家人共同经常居住的地方;Family: “家庭“，“家庭成员”。例如：Please come to my house this afternoon.今天下午请到我家来。He is not at home.他不在家。My family all get up early.我们全家都起得很早。6.fine, nice, good, well 四者都可用作形容词表示“好”之意，但前三者既可作表语又可作定语，而后者仅用作表语。主要区别在于：

(1)fine指物时表示的是质量上的“精细”，形容人时表示的是“身体健康”，也 可以用来指“天气晴朗”。例如：Your parents are very fine.你父母身体很健康。

That's a fine machine.那是一台很好的机器It's a fine day for a walk today.今天是散步的好时候。

(2)nice主要侧重于人或物的外表，有“美好”，“漂亮”的意思，也可用于问候或赞扬别人。例如：Lucy looks nice.露西看上去很漂亮。These coats are very nice.那些裙子很好看。Nice to meet you.见到你很高兴。It's very nice of you.你真好。

(3)good形容人时指“品德好”，形容物时指“质量好”，是表示人或物各方面都好的普通用语。例如：Her son is a good student.她儿子是一个好学生。The red car is very good.那辆红色小汽车很好。

(4)well只可用来形容人的“身体好”，但不能作定语，它也能用作副词作状语，多放在所修饰的动词之后。例如：I'm very well, thanks.我身体很好，谢谢。My friends sing well.我的朋友们歌唱得好。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在：

1.动词be的用法；

2.人称代词和物主代词的用法； 3.名词的单复数和所有格的用法； 4.冠词的基本用法； 5.There be句型的用法。

6.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 7.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空、完成句子。

【中考范例】

1.(2004年北京市中考试题)

Mary, please show ________ your picture.A.my B.mine C.I D.me 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是人称代词和物主代词的用法。本题中动词show后面跟双宾语，空白处应填入人称代词的宾格me作宾语。2.(2004年上海市徐汇区中考试题)

_________ orange on the desk is for you, Mike.A.A B.An C./ D.The 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是冠词的基本用法。因为是特指课桌上的那个橘子，所以用定冠词the。

3.(2004年哈尔滨市中考试题)

---What _______ the number of the girls in your class?

---About twenty.A.is B.am C.are D.be 【解析】答案：A。该题考查的是动词be的用法和主谓一致。the number作主语，应该是单数第三人称，动词be变为is。4.(2004年陕西省中考试题)

There _______ a football match on TV this evening.A.will have B.is going to be C.has D.is going to have 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是There be„句型和动词have用法区别。There be句型本身就表示“在某个地方存在某个人或物”，不能和动词have混在一起用。初一年级（下）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.a bottle of 2.a little 3.a lot(of)4.all day 5.be from 6.be over 7.come back 8.come from 9.do one’s homework 10.do the shopping 11.get down 12.get home 13.get to 14.get up 15.go shopping 16.have a drink of 17.have a look 18.have breakfast 19.have lunch 20.have supper 21.listen to 22.not…at all 23.put…away 24.take off 25.throw it like that 26.would like 27.in the middle of the day 28.in the morning / afternoon/ evening 29.on a farm 30.in a factory

II.重要句型

1.Let sb.do sth.2.Could sb.do sth.? 3.would like sth.4.would like to do sth.5.What about something to eat? 6.How do you spell …? 7.May I borrow…?

III.交际用语

1.—Thanks very much!—You're welcome.2.Put it/them away.3.What's wrong? 4.I think so.I don't think so.5.I want to take some books to the classroom.6.Give me a bottle of orange juice, please.Please give it / them back tomorrow.OK.9.What's your favourite sport? 10.Don't worry.11.I’m(not)good at basketball.12.Do you want a go? 13.That's right./ That‘s all right./ All right.14.Do you have a dictionary / any dictionaries? Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.15.We / They have some CDs.We / They don’t have any CDs.16.---What day is it today / tomorrow?---It’s Monday.17.---May I borrow your colour pens, please?---Certainly.Here you are.18.---Where are you from?---From Beijing.19.What's your telephone number in New York? 20.---Do you like hot dogs?---Yes, I do.(A little./ A lot./ Very much.)---No, I don't.(I don't like them at all.)21.---What does your mother like?---She likes dumplings and vegetables very much.22.---When do you go to school every day?---I go to school at 7:00 every day.23.---What time does he go to bed in the evening?---He goes to bed at 10:00.IV.重要语法

1.人称代词的用法； 2.祈使句；

3.现在进行时的构成和用法； 4．动词have的用法；

5．一般现在时构成和用法；

6．可数名词和不可数名词的构成和用法

【名师讲解】

1.That's right./ That‘s all right./ All right.That’s right意为“对的”，表示赞同对方的意见、看法或行为，肯定对方的答案或判断。例如：“I think we must help the old man.”“我想我们应该帮助这位老人。” “That's right.”或 “You're right.”“说得对”。That’s all right.意为“不用谢”、“没关系”，用来回答对方的致谢或道歉。例如： “Many thanks.” “That's all right.”

“Sorry.It's broken.” “That's all right.” All right.意为“行了”、“可以”，表示同意对方的建议或要求。有时还可以表示“身体很好” “Please tell me about it.” “请把此事告诉我。” “All right.”“好吧。” Is your mother all right?你妈身体好吗 2.make/do 这两个词都可以解释为“做”，但含义却不同，不能混用。make指做东西或制东西，do指做一件具体的事。Can you make a paper boat for me? 你能为我做个纸船吗？ He’s doing his homework now.他正在做他的作业。3.say/speak/talk/tell say：是最口语化的最普通的一个词，意为“说出”、“说道”，着重所说的话。如： “I want to go there by bus” , he said.他说，“我要坐汽车到那里去。”Please say it in English.请用英语说。speak : “说话”，着重开口发声，不着重所说的内容，一般用作不及物动词(即后面不能直接接宾语)。如：Can you speak about him? 你能不能说说他的情况？I don’t like to speak like this.我不喜欢这样说话。

speak 作及物动词解时，只能和某种语言等连用，表达在对话中恰当使用词汇的能力。如：She speaks English well.她英语说得好。

talk : 与 speak 意义相近，也着重说话的动作，而不着重所说的话，因此，一般也只用作不及物动词，不过，talk 暗示话是对某人说的，有较强的对话意味，着重指连续地和别人谈话。如：I would like to talk to him about it.我想跟他谈那件事。Old women like to talk with children.老年妇女喜欢和孩子们交谈。

tell : “告诉”,除较少情况外，一般后面总接双宾语。如：He’s telling me a story.他在给我讲故事。

tell a lie 撒谎

tell sb.to do sth./tell sb.not to do sth

如：.Miss Zhao often tells us to study hard.4.do cooking/ do the cooking do cooking 作“做饭”解，属泛指。do the cooking 特指某一顿饭或某一家人的饭。cooking为动名词，不能用作复数，但前面可用 some, much修饰。从do some cooking可引出许多类似的短语：do some washing 洗些衣服do some shopping 买些东西do some reading 读书do some writing 写些东西do some fishing 钓鱼

从以上短语可引申出另一类短语，不能用some, much或定冠词。

go shopping 去买东西go fishing 去钓鱼go boating 去划船go swimming 去游泳 5.like doing sth./ like to do sth.like doing sth.与like to do sth.意思相同，但用法有区别。前者强调一般性的爱好或者表示动作的习惯性和经常性；后来表示一次性和偶然性的动作。例如：

He likes playing football, but he doesn‘t like to play football with Li Ming.他喜欢踢足球，但是他不喜欢和李明踢。

6.other/ others/ the other/ another other表其余的，别的，如：Have you any other questions?你还有其他问题吗? others 别的人，别的东西.如：In the room some people are American, the others are French.在屋子里一些人是美国人,其他的是法国人。

the other表另一个（二者之中）one„，the other„如：One of my two brothers studies English, the other studies Chinese.我两个哥哥中的一个学习英文,另一个学中文。

another表三者以上的另一个，另一些如：There is room for another few books on the shelf.书架上还可以放点书。7.in the tree/ on the tree in the tree 与 on the tree.译成中文均为“在树上”但英语中有区别。in the tree表示某人、某事（不属于树本身生长出的别的东西）落在树上，表示树的枝、叶、花、果等长在树上时，要使用on the tree.如：There are some apples on the tree.那棵树上有些苹果。There is a bird in the tree.那棵树上有只鸟。8.some/ any

some和 any既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。但有以下两点需要注意。(1)some常用于肯定句中，any常用于否定句和疑问句中。如：

There is some water in the glass.Is there any water in the glass?There isn't any water in the glass.(2)在说话者希望得到肯定答复的一般疑问句中，或在表示请求，邀请的疑问句中，我们依然用some。如：Would you like some tea? 9.tall/ high

(1)说人，动物，树木等有生命的东西，主要用tall，不用high，例如 a tall woman 一个高个子妇女a tall horse 一个高大的马

(2)说一个不与地面接触的人和物的高时，要用high，而不用tall，比如人站在桌子上时，飞机飞上天时，例如： He is high up in the tree.他高高地爬在树上。The plane is so high in the sky.飞机在空中这么高。

(3)指建筑物、山时要tall或high都可以，不过high的程度比tall高。

(4)high可作副词，tall不能。

(5)tall的反义词为short, high的反义词为low.10.can/ could(1)can表示体力和脑力方面的能力，或根据客观条件能做某种动作的“能力”。例如：

Can you ride a bike?你会骑自行车吗?What can I do for you？要帮忙吗？Can you make a cake？你会做蛋糕吗？

(2)can用在否定句和疑问句中时有时表示说话人的“怀疑”“猜测”或不肯定。例如： Where can he be？他会在什么地方呢？Can the news be true？这个消息会是真的吗？ It surely can't be six o'clock already？不可能已经六点钟了吧？

You can't be hungry so soon，Tom，you've just had lunch.汤姆，你不可能饿得这么快，你刚吃过午饭。

What can he mean？他会是什么意思？

在日常会话中，can可代替may表示“允许”，may比较正式。例如：You can come in any time.你随时都可以来。

---Can I use your pen？我能用你的钢笔吗？---Of course，you can.当然可以。You can have my seat，I'm going now.我要走了，你坐我的座位吧。(3)could could 是 can的过去式，表示过去有过的能力和可能性（在否定和疑问句中）。例如： The doctor said he could help him.（能力）医生说他能帮助他。

Lily could swim when she was four years old.（能力）当丽丽四岁的时候她就会游泳。

At that time we thought the story could be true.（可能性）那时我们以为所说的可能是真的。could可代替can表示现在时间的动作，但语气较为婉转。例如： Could I speak to John，please？我能和约翰说话吗？ Could you？在口语中表示请求对方做事。例如：Could you wait half an hour？请你等半个小时好吗？Could you please ring again at six？六点钟请你再打电话好吗？(4)can的形式

只有现在式can和过去式could两种形式。能表示一般现在和一般过去两种时态，有时也能表示将来。所有其他时态（包括将来时）须用be able to加动词不定式来表示。例如：They have not been able to come to Beijing.他们没有能到北京来。11.look for/ find look for 意为“寻找”，而find意为“找到，发现”，前者强调“找”这一动作，并不注重“找”的结果，而后者则强调“找”的结果。例如：She can’t find her ruler.她找不到她的尺子啦。Tom is looking for his watch，but he can’t find it.汤姆正在寻找他的手表，但没能找到。12.be sleeping/ be asleep be sleeping 表示动作，意思是“正在睡觉”；be asleep 表示状态，意思是“睡着了”。

如：---What are the children doing in the room? 孩子们在房间里做什么？---They are sleeping.他们正在睡觉。

The children are asleep now.现在孩子们睡着了。13.often/ usually/sometimes often 表示“经常”，sometimes表示“有时候”，在表示发生频率上often要高于usually，usually要高于sometimes。这三个词表示的是经常性，一般性的动作或情况，常与一般现在时连用，常位于主要谓语动词的前面，其他谓语动词（be动词，情态动词和助动词）的后面，有时也可位于句尾。如果要加强语气，则放在句首。

We usually play basketball after school.我们通常放学后打篮球。Sometimes I go to bed early.有时，我睡觉很早。

He often reads English in the morning.他经常在早晨读英语。14.How much/ How many how much常用来询问某一商品的价格，常见句式是How much is / are„? How much is the skirt? 这条裙子多少钱？How much are the bananas? 这些香蕉多少钱？ how much后加不可数名词，表示数量，意为“多少“，how many后加可数名词的复数形式。How much meat do you want? 你要多少肉呀？How many students are there in your class? 你们班有多少人？

15.be good for/ be good to/ be good at be good for 表示“对„„有好处”，而be bad for表示“对„„有害”；be good to表示“对„„友好”，而be bad to表示“对„„不好”；be good at表示“擅长，在„„方面做得好”，而be bad at表示“在„„方面做得不好”。

如：Doing eye exercises is good for your eyes.做眼保健操对你的眼睛有好处。

Eating too much is bad for you health.吃的太多对你的身体有害。

Miss Li is good to all of us.李老师对我们所有的人都很友好。

The boss is bad to his workers.这个老板对他的工人不好。

Li Lei is good at drawing, but I'm bad at it.李雷擅长画画，但是我不擅长。16.each/ every each 和every都有“每一个”的意思，但含义和用法不相同。each从个体着眼，every从整体着眼。each 可用于两者或两者以上，every只用于三者或三者以上。如：We each have a new book.我们每人各有一本新书。There are trees on each side of the street.街的两旁有树。

He gets up early every morning.每天早晨他都起得早。each可以用作形容词、副词和代词；every只能用作形容词。如：Each of them has his own duty.他们各人有各人的义务。They each want to do something different.他们每个人都想做不同的事情。

17.一般现在时/现在进行时

一般现在时表示经常性的或习惯性的动作或存在的状态，也表示说话者的能力，还有自然现象；而现在进行时表示正在进行或发生的动作（构成方式为am/is /are/+doing）。I do my homework in the evening.我在晚上做作业。I'm doing my homework now.我现在正在做作业。

现在进行时常与now, these days, at the moment 或Look, listen等词连用；而一般现在时常与often, always, sometimes, usually, every day, in the morning, on Mondays等连用。We often clean the classroom after school.我们经常放学后打扫教室。Look!They are cleaning the classroom.看！他们正在打扫教室呢。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在：

1．动词一般现在时和现在进行时的用法，人称代词的用法，可数名词和不可数名词的构成和用法。

2．本册书中常见的交际用语

3．本册书中一些重点的词组和短语

考试形式往往是单项填空、完形填空、短文改错和短文填空。【中考范例】

1.（2004年安徽省中考试题）

---Hurry up!We’re all waiting for you.---I ________ for an important phone call.Go without me.A.wait B.was waiting C.am waiting D.waited

【解析】答案：C。表示现在正在进行的动作，用现在进行时。2.(2004年长春市中考试题)

Could you help ___ with ____ English, please?A.I, my B.me, me C.me, my D.my, I

【解析】答案：C。第一个空作宾语，应用人称代词的宾格me, 第二个空作定语，应用形容词性物主代词my。

3.(2004年长春市中考试题)Dr.White can _______ French very well.A.speak B.talk C.say D.tell 【解析】答案：A。说什麽语言常用动词speak。4.（2004年黄冈中考试题）

English is spoken by __people.A.a lot B.much many C.a large number of D.a great deal of 【解析】答案：C。只有a large number of 能用来修饰复数可数名词people。4.he, say, Beijing, big, beautiful, like, work, here 初二年级（上）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.on time 2.best wishes 3.give a talk 4.for example 5.short for 6.a waste of time 7.go on a field trip 8.go fishing 9.I agree 10.next week 11.the day after tomorrow 12.have a picnic 13.have some problems doing sth.14.go the wrong way 15.hurry up 16.get together 17.in the open air 18.on Mid-Autumn Day 19.come over 20.have to 21.get home 22.agree with 23.in the country 24.in town 25.all the same 26.in front of 27.on the left/right side 28.next to 29.up and down 30.keep healthy 31.grow up 32.at the same time 33.the day before yesterday 35.last Saturday 36.half an hour ago 37.a moment ago 38.just now 39.by the way 40.all the time 41.at first

II.重要句型

1.have fun doing sth.2.Why don’t you…? 3.We’re going to do sth.4.start with sth.5.Why not…? 6.Are you going to…? 7.be friendly to sb.8.You’d better do sth.9.ask sb.for sth.10.say goodbye to sb.11.Good luck(with sb)!

III.交际用语

1.Welcome backto school!2.Excuse me.I’m sorry I’m late, because the traffic is bad.3.It doesn’t matter.4.Happy Teachers’ Day!5.That’s a good idea.6.What are you going to do？ 7.Where are we going ? 8.What are we going to do ? 9.I’m good at…

10.It’s not far from…

11.Are you free tomorrow evening? 12.Would you and Lily like to come over to my home for Mid-Autumn Festival? 13.I’m glad you can come.14.Thanks for asking us.15.How about another one? 16.May I have a taste? 17.Let me walk with you.18.What do you have to do? 19.Do you live on a farm? 20.Which do you like better, the city or the country? 21.Which do you like best, dogs, cats or chickens? 22.Shall we go at ten? Good idea!23.---Let’s make it half past one.---OK.24.---Why not come a little earlier?---All right.25.Excuse me.Where’s the nearest post office, please? 26.It’s over there on the right.27.I’m sorry I don’t know.28.You’d better…

29.Thank you all the same.30.Which bus do I take? 31.Go along this road.32.What day was it yesterday? 33.I’m sorry to hear that.34.I hope you’re better now.35.Why did you call me? 36.I called to tell…

IV.重要语法

1.be going to的用法；

2.形容词的比较级、最高级； 3.形容词和副词的比较 4.一般过去时 【名师讲解】

1.on the street / in the street 表示“在街上”时，on the street 和 in the street 都可以，在美国多用on the street, 在英国多用in the street.例如：We have a house in the street.我们在街上有座房子。I met him on the street.我在街上遇见了他。2.would like / like

would like 和 like含义不同。like 意思是“喜欢”，“爱好”，而 would like 意思是“想要”。试比较： I like beer.=I’m fond of beer.我喜欢喝啤酒。I’d like a glass of beer= I want a glass of beer.我想要一杯啤酒。Do you like going to the cinema? 你喜欢看电影吗？Would you like to go to the cinema tonight? 你今晚想去看电影吗？ 3.another / the other(1)another 通常用于三个或三个以上或不确定数量中的任意一个人或 物体。例如： May I have another apple, please? 请在给我一个苹果好吗？

This coat is too small for me.Please show me another这件外套我穿太小，请再给我拿一件看看。

(2)the other 通常指两者中的另一个。例如：

He has two rulers.One is short.The other is long.他有两把尺子，一把短的，另一把长的。I have two brothers.One works in Xi’an.The other works in Beijing.我有两个兄弟，一个在西安工作，另一个在北京工作。4.have to /must

(1)have to和 must 都可以用来谈论义务，但用法略有不同。如果某人主观上觉得必须去做而又想去时，常用must。如果谈论某种来自“外界”的义务，常用have to。例如：I must stop smoking.我必须戒烟。（自己想戒烟）They have to work for the boss.他们不得不为那个老板工作。（条件逼得他们去工作）

(2)have to 可用于多种时态，must 只能用于一般现在时。例如：

I’ll have to get up early tomorrow morning.明天早晨我必须早早起床。We had to work long hours every day in order to get more money.为了多挣钱，我们不得不每天长时间地工作。(3)用于否定句时，mustn’t意思是“决不能”，“禁止”，而don’t have to意思是“不必”，相当于needn’t。例如：You mustn’t be late again next time.下一次你决不能再迟到。You don’t have to go there today.You can go there tomorrow.你今天不必到那里去了。你可以明天去。5.hear sb.or sth.doing sth./ herar sb.or sth.do sth.hear sb.or sth.doing sth.意思是“听到某人或某物在做某事”，而hear sb.or sth.do sth.意思“听到某人或某物做过某事”。试比较：I hear him singing an English song.听见他在唱英歌曲。I heard him sing an English song.我听见他唱一首英文歌。

类似hear 这种用法的还有see, watch, listen, feel等感官动词。6.any /some any和some 都可以同不可数名词和可数名词的复数形式连用，但some一般用在肯定句中；any用在疑问句和否定句中。试比较：I want some money.我想要点钱。Have you any money? 你有钱吗？I don’t have any money.我一点钱也没有。

some 有时也用于疑问句，表示说话人期待一个肯定回答或鼓励人家说“是”。例如： Would you like some more beer?请你再来点啤酒好吗？ Could I have some rice, please?请给我来点米饭好吗？ 7.hear /listen to listen to 和hear 都有“听”的意思，但含义有所不同。Listen to强调“听”的动作，hear 强调“听”的结果。例如：Listen to me ,please!I’m going to tell you a story.请听我说！我给你们讲个故事。

Listen!Can you hear someone crying in the next room? 听！你能听见有人在隔壁房间里哭吗？ I listened, but heard nothing.我听了听，但什么也听不见。hear 后面如果接宾语从句，常常表示“听说”。例如：

I hear some foreign students will visit our school.我听说一些外国学生将要访问我们学校。

I hear there is going to be a film in our school this evening.我听说今晚我们学校要演一场电影。

8.Let’s… /Let us…

Let’s„ 和Let us„ 都表示“让我们„„”, 如果us 包括听话人在内，其含义相同，附带问句用shall we.如果us 不包括听话人在内，其含义不同，Let us„的附带问句要用will you。例如：Let’s go shopping, shall we? 我们去购物好吗？ 9.take/ bring/ carry /get 这四个动词都有“拿”和“带”的意思，但含义有所不同。take意为“带走”，“拿走”，bring意为“带来”，“拿来”, get表示“到别的地方把某人或某物带来或拿来”，carry不强调方向，带有负重的意思。试比较：

My parents often take me there on holidays.我父母常常带我到那里去度假。

I’m going to take you to Beijing.我准备带你去北京。Bring me a cup of tea, please.请给我端杯茶来。

I’ll bring the book to you tomorrow.明天我把那本书给你带来。The waiter carried the me to the table服务员把肉送到桌上。The monkey carried the bag on her back.猴子把那个包背在背上。She went back to get her handbag.他折回去拿他的手提包。Let me get the doctor.让我去请医生吧。

10.far away /faraway(1)far away是一个副词短语，意思是“很远”。例如：Some are far away.Some are nearer.有些离得很远，有些离得近一些的。The village is far away from here.那个村子离这儿很远。(2)faraway是一个形容词，意思是“遥远的”，可以在句中作定语。例如： He lives in faraway mountain village.他住在一个遥远的小山村。11.find / look for find和look for 都有“找”的意思，但含义不同。find 强调“找”的结果，而look for 强调“找”的过程。请看下列例句：He is looking for his bike.他在找他的自行车。I’m looking for my watch, but can’t find it.我在找我的手表，但是找不到。I hope you will soon find your lost ring.希望你尽快找到丢失的戒指。另外，find还有“发现”；“感到”等意思。例如：I found a wallet in the desk.我在课桌里发现了一个钱包。

I find this book very interesting.我觉得这本书很有意思。12.in front of /in the front of In front of 表示在某物的前面，不在某物的范围内。In the front of 表示在某物的前部，在某物的范围内。试比较：My seat is in front of Mary’s.我的座位在玛丽座位的前面。He is sitting in the front of the car with the driver.他和司机坐在小车的前部。【考点扫描】

1.be going to的用法；

2.形容词的比较级、最高级； 3.形容词和副词的比较 4.一般过去时

5.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 6.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

【中考范例】

1.(2004年烟台市中考试题)

In the exam, the ________ you are, the ________ mistakes you’ll make.A.carefully, little B.more carefully, fewest C.more careful, fewer D.more careful, less 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是形容词和副词的比较以及他们的比较等级的用法。第一个空应填形容词careful的比较级，因为它在句中作表语，第二个空应填few的比较级，因为它修饰的是复数可数名词。2.(2004年河北省中考试题)

Bob never does his homework _________ Mary.He makes lots of mistakes.A.so careful B.as carefully as C.carefully D.as careful as 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是形容词和副词的用法比较。该空应填副词，因为它修饰的是动词does。该题用的是not as+副词+as的结构，所以答案应是B。3.(2004年重庆市中考试题)

That day I saw some parents _________ at the back of the classroom, ________ to the teacher.A.sitting, listened

B.sat, listened C.sitting, listening

D.sat, listening 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是see sb.doing sth.的句型结构和分词作状语的用法。第一个空stting在句中作saw的宾语补足语，第二个空listening做伴随状语。4.(2004年杭州市中考试题)

You ________ open the door before the train gets into the station.A.don’t have to B.mustn’t C.needn’t D.may not

【解析】答案:B。该题考查的是几个情态动词否定式的用法区别。don’t have to和needn’t的意思都是“不必”，may not的意思是“可以不”，只有mustn’t表示“不许”，“禁止”。初二年级（中）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.give a concert 2.fall down 3.go on 4.at the end of 5.go back 6.in ahurry 7.write down 8.come out 9.all the year round 10.later on

11.at times 12.ring sb.up

13.Happy New Year!14.have a party 15.hold on 16.hear from 17.be ready 18.at the moment 19.take out

20.the same as 21.turn over 22.get-together 23.put on 24.take a seat 25.wait for 26.get lost 27.just then 28.first of all 29.go wrong 30.make a noise 31.get on 32.get off 33.stand in line 34.at the head of 35.laugh at 36.throw about 37.in fact 38.at midnight 39.enjoy oneself 40.have a headache 41.have a cough 42.fall asleep 43.again and again 44.look over 45.take exercise

II.重要句型

1.be good for sth.2.I think … 3.I hope… 4.I love…

5.I don’t like… 6.I’m sure… 7.forget to do sth.8.take a message for sb.9.give sb.the message 10.help yourself to sth.11.be famous for sth.12.on one’s way to… 13.make one’s way to… 14.quarrel with sb.15.agree with sb.16.stop sb.from doing sth.III.交际用语

1.What’s the weather like today? 2.It’s cold, but quite suuny.3.How cold it is today!4.Yes, but it’ll be warmer later on.5.Shall we make a snowman? 6.Ok.Come on!7.Happy New Year!8.May I speak to Ann, please?？ 9.Hold on, please.10.Thanks a lot for inviting me to your party.11.Ok.But I’m afraid I may be a little late.12.Can I take a message for you? 13.That’s OK.It doesn’t matter.14.I’m very sorry, but I can’t come.15.I’m sorry to hear that.16.Happy birthday!17.Would you like...? Would you like to...? 18.Do you think...? Yes, I think so./ No, I don't think so.19.Do you agree? Yes, I agree./ No, don't really agree.I really can't agree.20.There are a few / a lot of.../ on it.21.So do we.22.I'm happy you like it.23.Which is the way to..., please? 24.Turn right/left at the...crossing.25.Go on until you reach...26.How can I get to...? Go down/up/along this road.27.What's the matter? 28.It'll take you half an hour to...29.We'd better catch a bus.30.It may be in...Ah, so it is 31.You must be more careful!32.You mustn't cross the road now.33.If you want to cross a street, you must wait for the green light.34.Please stand in line.35.You must wait for your turn.36.If you don't go soon, you'll be late.37.I don't feel very well.38.My head hurts.39.You mustn't eat anything until you see the doctor.40.What's the trouble? 41.What's the matter with…?

42.She didn't feel like eating anything.43.Nothing serious.44.Have/get a pain in… 45.No problem.46.Take this medicine three times a day.IV.重要语法

1.一般过去时；

2.反意疑问句的用法； 3.一般将来时； 4.感叹句；

5.简单句的五种基本句型；

6.情态动词can, may和must, have to的用法； 7.时间状语从句和条件状语从句。

【名师讲解】 1.above/ over/ on

这三个介词都表示“在„„之上”，但含义不同。on指在某物的表面上，和某物接触；above指在某物的上方，不和某物接触，但也不一定在某物的正上方；over指在某物的正上方，不和某物接触。试比较：There is a book on the desk.课桌上有一本书。I raise my right hand above my head.我把右手高举过头。There is a stone bridge over the river.河面上有座石桥。2.forget to do sth./forget doing sth.forget to do sth.意思是“忘记做某事”，实际上还没做；forget doing sth,意思是“忘记做过某事”，实际上已经做过了。试比较：I forgot to tell him the news.我忘记告诉他这条消息了。I forgot telling him the news.我已经把这条消息告诉他了，我却忘了。类似的词还有：remember, regret等。3.hope/wish hope和wish 在汉语中都有“希望”的意思，但其含义和用法有所不同。主要区别如下：(1)wish可以用来表示不可实现的愿望；hope只能用来表示可能实现的愿望。例如： I wish I were 20 years younger.我但愿自己能年轻二十岁。

I hope you’ll be better soon.我希望你能很快好起来。I wish the weather wasn’t so cold.但愿天气不这麽冷。I hope he will come, too.我希望他也能来。

(2)wish可以接sb.to do sth.的结构，而hope不可以。例如： Do you wish me to come back later? 你是否希望我再来？ 4.be sure to do sth./ be sure of/about sb.or sth.(1)be sure to do sth.可以用来表示说话人给对方提出要求，意思是“务必”，也可以用来表示说话人做出的推断，意思是“一定”，“肯定”。例如：

Be sure to lock the door when you leave.你离开时务必把门锁好。

It’s a good film.You are sure to enjoy it.这是一部好电影，你肯定会喜欢的。(2)be sure of/about sb.or sth.可用来表示“某人对某事有把握”。例如： I’m sure of his success.我相信他会成功。I think it was three years ago, but I’m not sure about it.我想那是三年前的事情，但我没有把握。5.hear from/hear of hear意思是“听到”，从哪里听到要用from来表示。例如：

I’ve heard from Xiao Wu that we’ll start out military training tomorrow.我听小吴说，我们明天开始军训。Listen to the tape and write out what you hear from Han Mei.听录音，并写出你从韩梅那里听到的内容。

hear from还有一个意思是“收到某人的来信”（=receive a letter from sb.）。例如： I heard from my pen friend in the U.S.A.last month.上个月我受到了美国笔友的来信。I heard from her last week.我上周接到了她的来信。

hear of和和hear from含义不同。hear of 意思是“听说”，“得知”（某事或某人的存在），常用在疑问句和否定句里。例如：Who is he? I’ve never heard of him.他是谁？我从来没有听说过他。I never heard of such a thing!这样的事我从来没有听说过。6.It’s a pleasure./With pleasure.It’s a pleasure这句话常用作别人向你表示致谢时的答语，意思是“那是我乐意做的”。例如：---Thank you for helping me.谢谢你地帮助。---It’s a pleasure.那是我乐意做的。---Thanks a lot.Bye.非常感谢。再见。---It’s a pleasure.那是我乐意做的。再见。类似的话还有 “Not at all.” “You are welcome.” “That’s all right.”

With pleasure也用作客气的答语，主要用在别人要你做某事，而你又非常愿意去做的场合。例如：---Will you please pass me the newspaper, please?请你把报纸递给我好吗？---With pleasure.当然可以。7.seem/look(1)二者都可以作“看起来”讲，但seem暗示凭借一些迹象作出的有根据的判断，这种判断往往接近事实；look着重强调由视觉得出的印象。两者都可跟(to be)+形容词和as if从句。如：He seems / looks(to be)very happy today.他今天看起来很高兴。It looks(seems)as if it it is going to rain.好像要下雨了。(2)但下列情况中只用seem不用look：

1)后跟不定式to do时。如：He seems to know the answer.他似乎知道答案。

2)在It seems that...结构中。如：It seems that he is happier now than yesterday.他像比昨天高兴些了。

8.be ready to do/be ready for/ get ready to do/get ready for(1)be ready to do和be ready for„表示“已作好„的准备”，强调状态(2)get ready to do和get ready for„表示“为„做准备”，强调行为。如：

I'm ready to do anything you want me to do.我愿意/随时准备做一切做你要我做的事。I'm ready for any questions you may ask.我愿意/随时准备回答你可能问的问题。He's getting ready to leave for Tokyo.他正准备动身去东京。

Let's get ready for the hard moment.我们为这一艰难时刻作好准备吧。(3)be ready to do 通常可理解“乐于做某事”，即思想上总是有做某事的准备。be not ready to do表示“不轻易做某事”。如：He's usually not ready to listen to others.他通常不轻易听从别人。9.at table/at the table at table在吃饭，at the table在桌子旁边。例如：The Greens are at table.格林一家人在吃饭。Mr.Black is sitting at the table and reading a book.布莱克先生坐在桌旁读书。10.reach, arrive/get to 三者都有“到达”之意。reach是及物动词，后直接加名词，get和arrive是不及物动词，不能直接加名词，须借助于介词。get to后加名词地点，若跟副词地点时，to去掉；arrive at +小地方，arrive in+大地方。如：

Lucy got to the zoo before 8 o'clock.露西8点前到了动物园。When did your parents arrive in Shanghai? 你父母何时到上海的？ It was late when I got home.我到家时天色已晚。11.sick/ill 二者都是形容词。当“生病的，患病“之意时，ill只作表语，不作定语；而sick既可作表语也可作定语。sick有“呕吐，恶心”的意思，只能作表语，而ill无此意。如：

Li Lei was ill last week.(只作表语)李磊上周生病了。He's a sick man.（作定语）他是病人。不能说成：He's an ill man.My grandfather was sick for a month last year.（作表语）我祖父去年病了一个月。12.in time/on time in time是“及时”的意思，on time是“准时，按时”。如：I didn't get to the bus stop in time.我没有及时赶上汽车。We'll finish our job on time.我们要按时完成任务。13.may be/maybe It may be in your inside pocket.= Maybe it is in your inside pocket.也许在你里边的口袋里。第一句中may be是情态动词+be 动词构成的谓语部分，意思是“也许是”，“可能是”；第二句中的maybe是副词，意思是“可能”，常位于句首，不能位于句中，相当于另一副词 perhaps。再如：Maybe you put it in that bag.也许你放在了那只包里。（不能说You maybe put it in that bag.）It may be a hat.那可能是顶帽子。（不能说It maybe a hat.或It maybe is a hat.）14.noise/ voice/ sound noise 指嘈杂声，噪音大的吵杂声。voice是指说话的声音，嗓音，嗓子。sound是指耳朵能够听到的声音、闹声等。它是表示声音之意的最普通的字。有时还用作科学上的声音。例如： Don't make so much noise!别那么大声喧哗！

I didn't recognize John's voice on the telephone.在电话里我听不出约翰的声音。He spoke in a low voice.他低声说话。We heard a strange sound.我们听到了一种奇怪的声音。Sound travels fast, but light travels faster.声音传得快，但是光传得更快。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在：

1.一般过去时；

2.反意疑问句的用法； 3.一般将来时； 4.感叹句；

5.简单句的五种基本句型；

6.情态动词can, may和must, have to的用法； 7.时间状语从句和条件状语从句； 8.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 9.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型天空、短文填空和完成句子。

【中考范例】

1.(2004年长沙市中考试题)

---Do you know if we will go to the cinema tomorrow?---I think we’ll go if we ________ too much homework.A.will have B.had C.won’t have D.don’t have

【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是条件状语从句的时态。在条件和时间状语从句里通常用一般现在是表示将来的动作。2.(2004年佛山市中考试题)You have been to Tibet, ______? I was told that the snow-covered mountains were very beautiful.A.have you B.haven’t you C.don’t you

【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是反意疑问句的构成。反意疑问句的前一部分是肯定句，后一部分就应该是否定的疑问部分，而且要和前一部分保持时态上的一致。3.(2004年扬州市中考试题)

---Jacky, look at that Japanese sumoist(相扑手).---Wow, ______________!

A.How a fat man

B.What a fat man C.How fat man

D.What fat man 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是感叹句的构成。这个感叹句省略了主谓部分，只保留了感叹部分。如果以What开头，就应该是What a fat man!如果是How开头，就应该是How fat!4.(2004年福建省泉州市中考试题)

---Thanks for your help.---__________________

A.It doesn’t matter

B.Don’t thank me C.You’re welcome

D.That’s right

【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是日常交际用语。回答别人的道谢通常用“That’s all right.”或”You’re welcome.” 初二英语（下）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.on time 2.out of 3.all by oneself 4.lots of 5.no longer 6.get back 7.sooner or later 8.run away 9.eat up 10.take care of 11.turn off 12.turn on 13.after a while 14.make faces 15.teach oneself 16.fall off 17.play the piano 18.knock at 19.to one's surprise 20.look up 21.enjoy oneself 22.help yourself 23.tell a story / stories 24.leave....behind …… 25.come along

26.hold a sports meeting 27.be neck and neck 28.as...as 29.not so / as...as 30.do one's best 31.take part in 32.a moment late 33.Bad luck!34.fall behind 35.high jump 36.long jump 37.relay race 38.well done!39.take off 40.as usual 41.a pair of 42.at once 43.hurry off 44.come to oneself 45.after a while 46.knock on 47.take care of 48.at the moment 49.set off 50.here and there 51.on watch 52.look out 53.take one’s place

II.重要句型

1.We’d better not do sth.2.leave one.oneself 3.find one’s way to a place 4.stand on one’s head 5.make sb.Happy 6.catch up with sb.7.pass on sth.to somebody 8.spend time doing sth.9.go on doing sth.10.get on well with sb.11.be angry with sb.12.be fed up with sth.13.not…until…

14.make room for sb.III.交际用语

1.We’re all by ourselves.2.I fell a little afraid.3.Don’t be afraid.4.Help!5.Can’t you hear anything?

6.I can’t hear anything / anybody there.7.Maybe it’s a tiger.8.Let’s get it back before they eat the food.9.Did she learn all by herself? 10.Could she swim when she was …years old? 11.She didn’t hurt herself.12.He couldn’t buy himself many nice things.13.Did he enjoy himself? 14.Help yourselves.15.Bad luck!16.Come on!17.Well done!Congratulations(to…)!18.It must be very interesting.19.I don’t think you’ll like it.20.It seems to be an interesting book.21.I’m sure(that)… I’m not sure if… I’m not sure what to… 22.I hope so.23.What was he/she drawing when…? 24.I’m sorry to trouble you.25.Would you please…?

26.What were you doing at ten o’clock yesterday morning? 27.You look tired today.28.You’d better go to bed early tonight, if you can.29.How kind!30.Let’s move the bag, or it may cause an accident.31.It’s really nice of you.32.Don’t mention it.33.Don’t crowd around him.IV.重要语法

1.不定代词/副词的运用；

2.反身代词的用法； 3.并列句；

4.形容词和副词的比较等级； 5.冠词的用法；

6.动词的过去进行时；

【名师讲解】 1.bring/take Bring表示“带来、拿来”，指从别处朝说话人所在或将在的地方“带来、拿来”。而take则表示“拿去、带走”，它表示的方向与bring相反，指从说话人所在地“拿走、带走”。如： Bring me the book, please.把那本书给我拿来。

Take some food to the old man.给那位老人带去些食物。2.somebody/ anybody/nobody

一般说来，somebody用于定句，anybody用于否定句、疑问句和条件状语从句。例如：

Somebody came to see you when you were out.你出来时有人来见你。

Does anybody live on this island? 有人在这岛上住吗？

I didn't see anybody there.我在那儿谁也没看见。

Don't let anybody in.I'm too busy to see anybody.别让任何人进来。我太忙，谁也不想见。

There is nobody in the room.房间里没人。

Nobody told me that you were ill, so I didn't know about it.谁也没告诉我你病了所以我不知道。

3.listen, listen to, hear 这三个词意思都是“听”，但是它们的用法不完全相同。它们的区别在于：(1)listen 只用于不及物动词，后面接人或人物做宾语，着重于“倾听”，指的是有意识的动作，至于是否听到，并非强调的重点。如：

Listen!Someone is singing in the classroom.听！有人在教室唱歌。

(2)listen to 为listen的及物形式，后面一定要接人或物做宾语，这里的to是介词。如： Do you like listening to light music?你喜欢听轻音乐吗？

(3)hear 可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词，意思是“听到、听见”，指用耳朵听到了某个声音，表示无意识的动作，着重于听的能力和结果。如：We hear with our ears.我们用耳朵听。She listens but hears nothing.她听了听，但是什么也没有听见。4.many/ much/ a few/ a little/ few/ little(1)many修饰可数名词，much修饰不可数名词；都表示许多。例如： He has many books.他有许多书。He drank much milk.他喝了许多牛奶。

(2)a few和a little都表示“有一点儿”，侧重于肯定，相当于“some”，但a few修饰可数名词，a little修饰不可数名词，例如：He has a few friends in London.他在伦敦有一些朋友。Would you like some coffee? Yes, just a little.喝点咖啡好吗？好的，只要一点。(3)few和little表示“几乎没有”，侧重否定。few后接可数名词，little后接不可数名词。例如： He is a strange man.He has few words.他是个怪人，他几乎不说什么话。Hurry up, there is little time left.赶快，没什么时间了。

5.either/ neither/ both

either可作形容词，一般指“两者中的任何一个”。有时也可表示“两个都„„”的意思，后跟名词的单数形式；neither: 指两者中没有一个，全否定；both: 指两者都，肯定。句中可作主语、宾语和定语，both后面应跟名词的复数形式。如：Neither of the films is good.两部电影都不好。（没有一部是好的）Either of the films is good.两部电影都不错。（谓语动词用单数）Both the teachers often answer the questions.这两个老师都常常解答问题。6.take part in/join take part in参加某种活动;join参加，加入某一政党或组织。例如：Can you take part in my party.你能来参加我的派对吗？We often take part in many school activities.我们经常参加学校里的一些活动。He joined the party in 1963.他1963年入的党。My little brother joined the army last year.我小弟去年参的军。7.quite/ rather/ very(1)quite 表示程度“很，十分，完全地”，“相当”。如：She is quite right.她对极了。That's not quite what I want.那并不完全是我所要的。(2)rather 表示程度上的“相当”，比预想地程度要大，通常用在不喜欢的情况下。如：It's rather cold today.今天的天气相当冷。

(3)very 表示程度“很，甚，极其，非常”，用于修饰形容词或副词，既可用在喜欢的情况下，也可用于不喜欢的情况下。应注意“a very +形容词+可数名词的单数”结构中，“a”应置于“very”之前，该结构相当“quite a/an +形容词+名词”的结构。如：Two months is quite a long time./ a very long time.两个月是一段很长的时间。It's a very nice day / quite a nice day.今天天气很好。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在：

1.不定代词/副词的运用；

2.反身代词的用法； 3.并列句；

4.形容词和副词的比较等级； 5.冠词的用法；

6.动词的过去进行时；

7.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 8.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。

【中考范例】

1.(2004年江西省中考试题)

---I called you yesterday evening, but there was no answer.---Oh, I am sorry I ___________ dinner at my friend’s home.A.have B.had C.was having D.have had 【解析】答案：C。该提考查的是动词的时态。表示过去某一时刻正在进行的动作应用过去进行时。

2.(2004年北京市中考试题)

---Which is _________, the sun, the moon or the earth?---Of course the moon is.A.small B.smaller C.smallest D.the smallest 【解析】答案：D。该提考查的是形容词的比较等级。三者进行比较，其中最小的应用最高级，而形容词最高级之前必须加顶冠词the。3.(2004年河北省中考试题)

Bob never does his homework _________ Mary.He makes lots of mistakes.A.so careful as B.as carefully as C.carefully as D.as careful as 【解析】答案：B。该提考查的是形容词和副词的用法区别。空白处所缺的词是修饰动词短语does his homework的，应该用副词。另外，表示“某人做事不如某人细心”应用“not as carefully as”这样的结构。

4.(2004年吉林省中考试题)

---I like riding fast.It’s very exciting.---Oh!You mustn’t do it like that, ________ it may have an accident.A.and B.or C.so D.but

【解析】答案：B。该提考查的是连接并列句的并列连词的选择。And通常连接两个意思一致的并列句，so连接两个有因果关系的并列句，but连接两个有转折关系的并列句，or相当于if not意思是“否则”。

初三年级（上）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.at the moment

2.used to 3.for a while

4.walk away with sth.5.leave for some place 6.sooner or later 7.pay for

8.come up with an idea 9.think of 10.have a try

11.all over the world 12.be famous for 13.large numbers of 14.all the year round 15.no matter what 16.give up 17.for example 18.by the way 19.on business 20.so far 21.come true 22.set off 23.slow down 24.go on doing 25.wait for 26.be proud of 27.be afraid of 28.speak highly of 29.a year and a half 30.half a year 31.pick up 32.as soon as 33.keep… clean 34.take care of 35.cut down

36.make a contribution to 37.base on 38.make sure 39.take away 40.begin with 41.right now 42.as soon as possible 43.leave a message 44.all kinds of things 45.walk around 46.fall asleep 47.wake up 48.go on a trip

49.have a good time 50.take photos 51.come out 52.come on

53.have a family meeting 54.talk about 55.go for a holiday 56 go scuba diving 57.write down 58.by oneself 59.walk along

60.get a chance to do sth 61.have a wonderful time 62.book a room 63.have an accident 64.be interested in 65.use sth.to do sth.66.make a TV show 67.be amazed at 68.take part in 69.feed on 70.get out of

II.重要句型

1.Why don’t you do sth.?

2.make sb.Happy 3.borrow sth.from sb.4.forget to do sth.5.pay fro sth.6.return sth.To sb.7.learn sth.from sb.8.be famous for sth.9.No matter what…

10.be with sb.11.go on doing sth.12.speak highly of sb.13.keep doing sth.14.allow sb.To do sth.15.encourage sb.to do sth.16.It is said that…

III.交际用语

1.---Excuse me, have you got …?---Yes, I have.(Sorry, I haven’t.)2.---Why don’t you …?---Thanks, I will.3.---Thanks a lot.(Thank you very much.)---You are welcome.4.---Have you ever done…?---Yes, I have, once.(No, never.)5.---I’ve just done…---Really? 6.---What’s …like ?

7.---How long have you been…?---Since… 8.---Have you ever been to…?

---I’ve never been there.(None of us has./ Only …has.)9.---Would you like to have a try?---I don’t think I can…

10.---What have you done since…?

11.---How long have you been at this …?---For…

12.---How long has she/ he worked there…?

---She’s / He’s worked there for… / all her / his life.13.---I’m sorry he isn’t here right now.14.---May I help you? 15.---That’s very kind of you.16.---Could we go scuba diving? 17.---Could you tell us how long we’re going to be away? 18.---Let’s try to find some information about it, OK? 19.---Could you please tell me how to search the Internet? 20.---Go straight along here.21.---Please go to Gate 12.22.---Please come this way.23.---Could you tell me what you think about Hainan Island? 24.---That sounds really cool!

IV.重要语法 1.宾语从句

2.现在完成时

3.一般过去时与现在完成时的用法比较： 【名师讲解】 1.Maybe/ may be

(1)maybe是副词，意思是“大概，也许”，常用作状语。例如： Maybe you put it in your bag.也许你把它放在包里了。“Will he come tomorrow?”“Maybe not.”

“他明天来吗？”“也许不”。

(2)may be相当于是情态动词may与be动词搭配一起作谓语，意思是“也许是„，可能是„”。

例如：It may be 9:00 when they arrive.他们可能于九点到达。The man may be a lawyer.那人也许是律师。

2.borrow/ lend/ keep/ use

(1)borrow表示的是从别人那里借来东西，即我们通常所说的“借进来”。例如：We often borrow books from our school library.我们经常从学校图书馆借书。I borrowed this dictionary from my teacher.我从老师那儿借来了这本字典。

borrow是一个瞬间完成的动作，因此不能与时间段连用。

例如：You can borrow my recorder for three days.(错误)I have borrowed this book for only one week.(错误)

(2)lend表示的是把自己的东西借给别人，即我们通常所说的“借出去”。例如：Thank you for lending me your bike.谢谢你把自行车借给我。He often lends money to his brother.他经常借钱给他弟弟。lend与borrow一样，也是一个瞬间完成的 动作，不能与一段时间连用。

(3)keep的意思也是“借”，但一般是指借来后的保存或使用阶段，是一段持续的时间，因此可以与时间段连用。例如：You can keep my recorder for three days.我的录音机你可以借用三天。

I have kept this book for only one week.这本书我才刚借了一星期。(4)use也可以当“借用”讲，但它的本意是“用，使用”。例如：May I use your ruler? 我能借你的尺子用一下吗？He had to use this public telephone.他不得不使用这部公用电话。3.leave/ leave for(1)leave意思是“离开，留下”。例如：We left Shanghai two years ago.我们两年前离开了上海。

He left his cell phone in the taxi last week.他上周把手机落在出租车里了。(2)leave for意思是“前往”，表示要去的目的地。例如：We will leave for Tibet next month.我们将于下月去西藏。The train is leaving for Moscow.这趟火车即将开往莫斯科。4.since/ for

(1)since用于完成时态，既能用作介词，也能用作连词，后常接时间点，意思是“自从”。例如：

He has been a worker since he came into this city.自从他来到这个城市，他就是工人了。

I have never seen him since we last met in Shanghai.自从我们上次在上海见过之后我再也没见过他。

since作连词，还有“既然”的意思。例如： Since you are interested in it, just do it.既然你对它感兴趣，那就做吧。You can have fun now since you’ve finished your work.既然你已经做完了功课，就开心玩会儿吧。

(2)for用于完成时，用作介词，后常接一段时间，意思是“经过„”。例如： I have learned English for five years.我已经学了五年英语了。They have waited for you for 30 minutes.他们已经等了你三十分钟了。

for也可以用作连词，但意思是“因为”。例如： They missed the flight for they were late.他们由于完到了而误了航班。He fell ill for many reasons.他由于多种原因病倒了。5.neither/ either/ both

(1)neither作代词是对两者都进行否定，意思为“两者都不”，作主语时谓语动词用单数.例如：Neither of the boys is from England.这两个男孩都不是来自英国。I know neither of them.他们两个我都不认识。

neither用作形容词，也修饰单数名词，意思与作代词时相同；用作连词时，一般与nor搭配，表示 “既不„也不”。作主语时，谓语动词也遵循就近原则。例如：She neither ate nor drank yesterday.她昨天既不吃也不喝。Neither he nor we play football on Sundays.他和我们星期天都不踢球。

(2)either作代词时，是指两者中的任意一方,(两者之)每一个，故作主语时谓语动词用单数.例如：Either of the books is new.这两本书任何一本都是新的.She doesn’t like either of the films.这两部电影她都不喜欢.either作形容词, 用来修饰单数名词,意思与作介词时相同.例如：Either school is near my home.(这两所学校中的)任何一所学校都离我家很近.Either question is difficult.两个问题(中的任何一个)都难.either作连词时,一般与or搭配,表示两者选其一，意思是“不是„就是”。作主语时，谓语动词遵循就近原则。

Either he or I am right.不是他就是我是对的。Either my sister or my parents are coming to see me.不是我姐姐就是我父母要来看我。(3)both作代词时，指的是所涉及到的“两者都”, 故作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。

I like both of the stories.这两个故事我都喜欢。Both of my parents are teachers.我父母两人都是老师。

both作形容词时，用来修饰两者,意思与作代词时相同.Both his arms are hurt.他的两只胳膊都受伤了。

Both these students are good at English.这两个学生都擅长英语。

both用作连词时，多与and搭配，表示“既„又, 不仅„而且”, 作主语时,谓语动词仍用复数形式。

Both piano and violin are my bobbies.钢琴和小提琴都是我的爱好。They study both history and physics.他们既学历史，又学物理。

6.find/look for/ find out

(1)find强调找的结果，意思是“找到”。此外还有“发现，发觉”的意思，后可接宾语从句。

例如：Jim couldn’t find his hat.吉姆找不着帽子了。Have you found your lost keys? 你找到丢失的钥匙了吗？

He found the lights were on along the street.他发现沿街的灯都亮了(2)look for的意思为“寻找”，指的是找的动作而非结果。另外，还有“盼望，期待”的意思。

例如：She is looking for her son.她正在找她的儿子。We’ve been looking for the car since early this morning.我们从今天一大早就开始找这辆车了。I look for the coming holiday.我期待着即将来临的假期。

(3)find out含有经过观察、研究或探索而得知的意思，后常接较抽象的事物，意思是“找出，发现，查明（真相）”等。例如： I can find out who took my money away.我能查出谁拿了我的钱。

Could you find out when the plane arrives? 你能设法知道飞机何时到吗？

7.forget to do/ forget doing

(1)forget to do是指忘记去做某件事了，即该事还没有做。例如： Please don’t forget to call this afternoon.今天下午不要忘了给我打电话。I forgot to take some small change with me.我身上忘了带零钱了。

(2)forget doing是指忘记某件已经做过的事情，即该事已经做了，但被忘记了。例如：He forgot telling me his address.他忘了告诉过我地址了。They forgot having been here before.他们忘了以前曾来过这儿。8.stop doing/ stop to do

(1)stop doing是指停止做某事，即doing这个动作不再继续。例如：They stopped debating.他们停止了辩论。（不辩论了）He had to stop driving as the traffic lights changed in to red.由于交通灯变成了红色他不得不停车。

(2)stop to do是指停下来开始做另一件事，即停止原先的事，开始做do这个动作。

例如：She stopped to have a rest.她停下来休息会儿。（开始休息）They stopped to talk.他们停下来开始交谈。9.except/ besides

(1)except是指不包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“撇开„不谈”,表示两部分的不同。Everyone is excited except me.除我以外的每个人都很激动。（他们激动，而我却不激动）All the visitors are Japanese except him.除他以外的所有游客都是日本人。（其他人是日本人，可他不是）(2)besides是包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“除之外„还、除之外„又”，表示两部分的相似性。例如：Twenty-five students went to the cinema besides him.除他以外，还有25个学生去看了电影。(他和另外25人都去了)We like biology besides English.除了英语外，我们还喜欢生物。（生物和英语都喜欢）besides还可用作副词，意思是“此外；而且”，常用于句首或句尾。

例如：He is a great thinker, and besides, he is a politician.他是一名伟大的思想家，除此以外，他还是一位政治家。

They encouraged me, and they supported me with money, besides.他们不仅鼓励我，而且与我以金钱上的支持。

10.keep doing/ keep on doing

(1)keep doing指的是连续地、坚持不断地做某事，中间不间断。例如：It kept blowing for a whole day.刮了一整天风了。The temperature keeps dropping.温度持续下降。(2)keep on doing是指反复坚持做某事，但动作之间略有间隔。例如：They have kept on writing to each other for many years.他们已经互相通信多年了。After drinking some water, he kept on talking.喝了一些水后，他坚持讲话。11.seem/ look

(1)seem一般着重于以客观迹象为依据，意思是“似乎、好象、看起来„”。例如：The baby seems to be happy.婴儿看上去似乎很高兴。He seemed to be sorry for that.他似乎为那件事感到抱歉。

seem能与to do结构连用，而look不能。例如：It seems to rain.似乎要下雨了。They seemed to have finished their work.他们似乎已经完成了工作。

在it作形式主语的句型中只能用seem。例如：It seems that he is quite busy now.他现在看起来很忙。

It seems to us that there is nothing serious.在我看来没什么大不了的。

(2)look用作“看起来；好像”时，常从物体的外观或样貌上来判断，是以视觉所接受的印象为依据的。

例如：The room looks clean.这间房看起来很干净。The girl looks like her mother.那女孩看起来向她的妈妈。12.such/ so

(1)such常用作形容词，用来修饰名词。例如：Don’t be such a fool.别这么傻。

He is such a clever boy.他是如此聪明的一个男孩。

(2)so是副词，用来修饰形容词或副词。例如：He is so kind!他真好心！

Why did you come so late? 你为何回来得如此晚？

当名词前有many, much, few, little等表示多、少时，应该用so。

例如：He has so many friends.他有如此多的朋友。

Only so little time is left!才剩这么一点儿时间！

13.either/ too/ also

(1)either用作“也”时是副词，常用于否定句句尾。

例如：She is not a Japanese, I’m not, either.她不是日本人，我也不是。My sister doesn’t like this song, either.我妹妹也不喜欢这首歌。(2)too常用于肯定句或疑问句尾，表示“也”。

例如：He likes China, too.他也喜欢中国。

Are you in Grade 3, too? 你也在三年级吗？(3)also也常用于肯定句或疑问句，但一般位于句中。

例如：We are also students.我们也是学生。

He also went there on foot.他也是走着去的。Did you also want to have a look? 你也想看看吗？

14.if/ whether

在下列情况下只能用whether而非if：

(1)与or not连用时，只能用whether.We want to know whether you are ill or not.我们想知道你是否生病了。

Please tell me whether or not you have finished your work.请告诉我们你是否完成了工作。(2)后接动词不定式时，只能用whether.Adam didn’t know whether to go or stay.亚当不知道是走还是留。

He hasn’t decided whether to have dinner with me.他还没决定是否和我共进晚餐。(3)所引导的宾语从句放在主句之前时，只能用whether.Whether it will rain or snow, we don’t mind.我们不在乎将要刮风还是下雨。Whether I won or lost, she didn’t want to know.我是赢是输她不想知道。(4)引导主语从句或表语从句时，一般用whether.The most important was whether they had gone.最重要的是他们是不是已经走了。Whether he will go with me is a secret.他是否会和我一起去还是个秘密。if能引导条件状语从句，表示“如果，假如”，而whether没有此用法。We’ll have a football match if it doesn’t rain tomorrow.如果明天不下雨，我们 要进行足球赛。I’ll tell him if I sees him.我看见他就告诉他。

If you’re in danger, please call 110.如果你遇到危险，请拨打110。15.cost/ spend/ pay/ take

(1)cost一般用某物来做主语，表示“（某物）值„、花费„”，既能指花费时间也能指金钱。The new bike costs me 300 yuan.这辆新自行车花了我三百元。

It will cost you a whole to read through this book.通读这本书将会花费你整整一周时间。cost 还可以用作名词，表示“成本、费用、价格、代价”等。What’s the cost of this TV set? 这台电视机的成本是多少钱？

They succeeded at the cost of hard work.他们辛苦地工作换来的成功。(2)spend一般用某人来作主语，表示“（某人）花费„，付出„”，也能指时间或金钱，指时间时常与 in搭配，指金钱时常与on或for搭配。

We spent two days in repairing this machine.我们花了两天时间修理这台机器。Mr.Lee spends $20 on books every month.李先生每月花二十美元在书上。

(3)pay用作动词时，一般也以某人作主语，但一般指花钱、付款等，很少用来指花费时间。常与for搭配使用。例如：They paid 70 yuan for the tickets.他们花了七十元买票。He was too poor to pay for his schooling.他穷得交不起学费。pay还可以用作名词，意思为“薪水、工资”等。

It’s hard for me to live with such low pay.我很难靠这么低的薪水生活下去。(4)take也指“花费(时间、金钱)”，但通常用某事、某物做主语，或用形式主语it.How long will the meeting take? 会议要开多久？It took me several hours to get there.我花了几个小时才到那儿。16.bad/ badly

这两个词的意思含有“坏、糟、严重”等意思，且它们有共同的比较级worse和最高级worst。

(1)bad是一个形容词，意思是“坏的，糟糕的，差的，严重的”。

例如：I don’t think he is a bad person.我并不认为他是一个坏人。I had a bad headache.我的头疼得很厉害。

(2)badly是一个副词,意思是“不好地，差”，也可以表示程度，意为“严重地，非常，极度”。例如：We need help badly.我们急需帮助。His arm was badly hurt.他的胳膊严重受伤了。17.interested/ interesting

(1)interested是指“对„产生兴趣的，对„感兴趣的”，一般用人做主语，后常用介词in.例如：He was interested in biology before.他以前对生物感兴趣。I’m not interested in art.我对艺术不感兴趣。

(2)interesting的意思是“有趣的”，指能够给人带来兴趣的某人或某事物。例如：

He is an interesting old man.他是个有趣的老头。The interesting story attracted me.这个有趣的故事吸引了我。

18.dead/ die/ death/ dying

(1)dead是形容词，意思为“死了的、无生命的”，表示状态，可以与一段时间连用。例如： The tree has been dead for ten years.这棵树死了有十年了。The rabbits are all dead.这些兔子都是死的。

(2)die是动词，意思为“死、死亡”，是一个瞬间动词，不能与一段时间连用。例如：

My grandpa died two years ago.我爷爷两年前去世了。The old man died of cancer.老人死于癌症。

(3)death是名词，意思为“死亡、去世”等。

The memorial hall was built one year after his death.他死后一年，纪念馆建成了。

His death is a great loss to us.他的死是我们的巨大损失。

(4)dying 是die的现在分词，用作形容词，意思是“垂死的、即将死去的”。

The doctors have saved the dying man.医生们救活了那个垂死的人。The poor dog had no food, it was dying.可怜的狗没有食物,快要饿死了。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.宾语从句的时态和语序；

2.一般过去时和过去完成时的用法区别； 3.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 4.本单元学习的日常交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。【中考范例】

1.（2004年北京市海淀区中考试题）

---Do you know ________________?---Only ten months old.A.when does Tiger Woods start golfing B.when did Tiger Woods start golfing C.when Tiger Woods starts golfing

D.when Tiger Woods started golfing 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是宾语从句的时态和语序。这个宾语从句的时态应用一般过去时，应为这里说的是过去的事情。语序应用陈述句的语序，所以正确答案是: when Tiger Woods started golfing。

2.（2004年北京市海淀区中考试题）

I’m interested in animals, so I _____________ every Saturday working in an animal hospital.A.pay B.get C.take D.spend 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是pay, get, take和spend这四个动词的用法区别。只有动词spend可以用在sb.spends time doing sth.这个句型里，所以正确答案影视spend。3.（2004年天津市中考试题）

Could I ________ your telephone? I have something important to tell my parents.A.keep B.borrow C.use D.lend 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是keep, borrow, use和lend四个动词的用法区别。keep的真正含义是“保留”，borrow的含义是“借入”，lend的含义是“借出”，只有use的含义是“使用”。在这个句子里实际上是“使用”的意思，所以应选use。4.（2004年鄂州市中考试题）

---Hi, Ann.Where’s your brother? I need his help.---He left home two weeks ago and ________away ever since.A.is B.was C.has been D.had been 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是动词时态的用法区别。一般现在时表示经常发生的动作或现在所处的状态；一般过去时表示过去的动作或过去所处的状态；过去完成时表示过去的动作或过去的时间以前发生的事情；现在完成时表示动作或状态从过去某一时间开始一直延续到现在或刚刚结束。这里只能用现在完成时。初三年级（中）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.give up 2.try out 3.most of

4.not…any more 5.at the age of 6.at that time

7.send message by telegraph 8.graduate from 9.turn down 10.put up 11.at the top of 12.get together

13.from house to house 14.at the end of 15.on top of 16.as well 17.climb down 18.in a single night 19.even though 20.live on

21.once upon a time 22.according to 23.keep warm

24.on the other hand 25.on show 26.on display 27.in the future 28.look up 29.Tree Planting Day 30.just right

31.as often as possible 32.wash away 33.in this way

34.in a few years' time 35.point to 36.thanks to 37.more or less 38.so far 39.shut down 40.send up 41.put off

II.重要句型

1.set one's mind to do sth.2.put … together 3.stop…from… 4.keep…from… 5.be filled with sth.6.give birth to 7.be covered with 8.be made of 9.fill…with… 10.match…with 11.be used for 12.have nothing to do with 13.come up with 14.no matter how… 15.keep sb./sth.warm

III.交际用语

1.---I'm trying to … 2.---I'll …

3.---Which of these would you like most to …? 4.---What do you want to … ? 5.---I want to… 6.---I hope to … 7.---I plan to… 8.---I'm going to…

9.---I'm so happy that … 10.---I'm glad ….11.---me too.12.---What's this called in English? 13.---What's it made of? 14.---It's made of …

15.---What's it used for? 16.---It's used for …

17.---English is widely used for business/ …

18.---It is one of the world's most important languages as it is so widely used.19.---Where is / are … grown / produced / made ? 20.---The(ground)must be just right… 21.---It's best to …

22.---The hole should not be too deep.23.---The Great Green Wall is 7000 kilometres long, and between 400 and 1700 kilometres wide.24.---The more, the better.25.---More or less!

26.---The(ground)must be just right… 27.---The hole should not be too deep.28.掌握以下常见标志：

ENTRANCE EXIT PUSH PULL NO SMOKING NO PARKING FRAGILE THIS SIDE UP NO PHOTOS DANGER BUSINESS HOURS PLAY STOP PAUSE ON OFF IV.重要语法

1.动词被动语态的结构和用法； 2.动词不定式的功能和用法。【名师讲解】 1.be able to/ can

(1)都能表示“能够，具备干某件事的能力”这个含义，此时可以互换。

Mr.Green is able to finish the work on time.= Mr.Green can finish the work on time.格林先生能够按时完成这项工作。

(2)be able to可以用于各种时态，而can 为情态动词，多用于现在时，其过去式为could。

We are sure he will be able to be an artist when he grows up.我们相信他长大后能够成为一名画家。

Miss Lin has been able to pay the car by herself.林小姐已经能够自己负担那辆车了。

(4)Can除了表示“能够，有能力做某事”以外，还有如下用法，而be able to 则没有。表示请求，但语气没有could委婉

Can I have a look at this picture? 我能看看这张图片吗？

Can we leave school after 6:00 p.m.?我们可以在下午6点之后再离开学校吗？ 表示可能性。

That man can’t be our new teacher.那人不可能是我们的新老师。The exam can’t be too difficult.考试不会太难。2.bring/ take/carry/fetch

(1)bring一般是指拿来，即从别处往说话人这里拿，翻译成“带来”。

He brought us some good news.他给我们带来了一些好消息。

Please don’t forget to bring your homework tomorrow.明天请别忘了把家庭作业带来。(2)take一般是指从说话人这里往别处拿，翻译成“带走”。

Please take the umbrella with you.It’s going to rain.要下雨了，请把伞带上。She took the dictionary away.她把字典拿走了。

(3)carry不强调方向，表示“携带、背着、运送、搬扛”等意思。

They carried the boxes into the factory.他们把箱子搬进了工厂。

A taxi carried them to the station.出租车送他们到了车站

(4)fetch表示的是“去取来、去拿来、去叫来”等意思，包含去和来两趟。

The waiter fetched them some apples.侍者为他们取来了一些苹果。

Mother fetched the doctor for her ill son.妈妈为生病的儿子请来了医生。3.whole/ all

(1)whole强调一个完整如一，互不分割的整体。

The whole country is suffering the war.整个国家正遭遇战争。I just want to know the whole story.我仅仅只想知道完整的故事。

whole在句中的位置是放在所有格，冠词和指示代词的之后。

They will spend their whole holiday in Canada.他们将到加拿大渡过整个假期。（所有格后）She has finished writing the whole book.她已经写完了整本书。（冠词后）

whole用来修饰可数名词（名词用单数）。

He ate the whole cake.他把整个蛋糕都吃了。（强调整整一个蛋糕）(2)all强调由一个个部分组成的“全部”。

Miss Green knew all the students in the class.格林小姐认识这个班上的所有人。（一个一个全认识）

all在句中的位置是放在所有格，定冠词和指示代词的之前。

Jim finished all his homework in twenty minutes.吉姆在20分钟之内完成了所有的作业。（所有格前）

Of all the boys here, he sings best.在这里所有的男孩之中，他唱的最好。（定冠词前）The boy can answer all these questions.那个男孩能够回答所有的这些问题。（指示代词前）all既能修饰可数名词（名词须用复数），又能修饰不可数名词。

All these five books are mine.这五本书都是我的。（修饰可数名词）She was worried about her son all the time.她总在为她的儿子担心。（修饰不可数名词）4.fill/ full

(1)fill常作动词，与with连用，意思是“注满、装满”，也能表示“填空；补缺”的意思。例如：

He filled the box with chalk.他把粉笔装满了盒子。The bucket is filled with water.水桶里装满了水。

(2)full是形容词，翻译成“满的，装满的”，常与of连用。此外还能表示“完全的”和“吃饱的，过饱的”。

All the rooms are full of people.所有的房间都满人了。

The bus was full.He had to wait for the next one.这辆车人满了，他只有等下一辆。5.be made of/ be made from/ be made in/ be made into

(1)be made of表示“由„制成”, 一般指能够看出原材料，或发生的是物理变化。例如：

This table cloth is made of paper.这张桌布是由纸做的。

This salad is made of apples and strawberries.这种沙拉是由苹果和草莓做的。

(2)be made from也表示“由„制成”，但一般指看不出原材料，或发生的是化学变化。例如： Bread is made from corn.面包是小麦做的。The lifeboat is made from some special material.这个救生艇是由某种特殊材料制成的。(3)be made in指的是产地，意思为“于„制造”。The caps are made in Russia.这些帽子产于俄罗斯。

My mother likes to buy things which are made in China.我妈妈喜欢买中国产的东西。(4)be made into的意思为“被制成为„”。

This piece of wood will be made into a small bench.这块木头将要被制成一个小凳。The paper has been made into clothes for the doll.纸被做成了洋娃娃的衣服。6.none/ no one/ neither(1)none既能指人，又能指物，意思是“没有一个，无一”，常用作代词，与of连用。None of us has heard of him before.我们没有一个人以前听说过他。I like none of the coats.那些外套我一件都不喜欢。none用作主语时，谓语动词用单复数皆可。例如：

None of the answers is true.没有一个答案是正确的。None of the rooms are mine.没有一间房子是我的。

(2)no one只能用来指人，且不能与of连用。例如：

No one is absent.没有人缺席。I knew no one there.那里我一个人也不认识。no one用作主语时，谓语动词只能用单数。

例如：No one agrees with you.没有人同意你的说法。

(3)neither作代词是对两者都进行否定，意思为“两者都不”，作主语时谓语动词用单数。例如：Neither of the boys is from England.这两个男孩都不是来自英国。I know neither of them.他们两个我都不认识。7.found/ find(1)find的意思是“找到、发现”，其过去式和过去分词都是found.I can't find my glasses.我找不着我的眼镜了。He found it boring to sit here alone.他发现独自坐在这里很没劲。

(2)found是另外一个词，与find并没有关系，意思是“成立、建设”，常用作及物动词。

The People's Republic of China was founded in 1949.中华人民共和国成立于1949年。

The school was founded by the local residents.这所学校是由当地居民修建的。8.hear / hear of/ hear from(1)hear的意思是“听见；听说，得知”，后面能接名词、代词或宾语从句。

例如： We heard the news just a moment ago.我刚听说这个消息。Can you hear me? 能听见我说话吗？

(2)hear of的意思是“听说”，一般指非直接的听见，而是听别人说的。后不能接宾语从句。例如：

I have never heard of her.我从未听说过她。They heard of the film long time ago.他们很久以前就听说过这部电影。

(3)hear from的意思是“收到来信”，与“听”无关。例如：I often hear from him.我经常收到他的来信。

He hasn't heard from his mother for a long time.他很久没有收到妈妈的信了 9.send/ send for(1)send意思是“送往，派遣”，还有“发信，寄信”的意思。例如：The company sent him to study abroad.公司派他到国外学习去了。Mr.Brown sent her children away.布郎夫人送走了孩子们。(2)send for意思是“召唤；派人去取；派人去拿”，而非本人亲自去。例如：They have sent for a repairman.他们已经派人去请了一名修理工。She sent for some flowers.她派了人去买花。10.get to/ arrive/ reach(1)arrive后不能直接接地点，是一个不及物动词。若表示到达一个相对大的地点，用arrive in;若表示相对小的地点，用arrive at.The delegation will arrive in China at 5:00 p.m.代表团将于下午5:00到达北京。

It was dark when they arrived at the railway station.当他们到达火车站的时候，天已经黑了。

When did she arrive here last time? 她上次是什么时候到这儿的？（副词前省略介词）(2)reach能直接接所到达的地点，是一个及物动词。例如：They reached London on Friday.他们星期五到达了伦敦。The news only reached me yesterday.我于昨天才接到这个消息。reach还有“伸手去取，伸手触及，联络”等意思。

Can you reach that apple on the tree? 你能够到树上的哪个苹果吗？ He can always be reached on the phone.可随时打电话跟他联系。(3)get在表示“到达”时是不及物动词，应与to搭配使用。We often get to school on foot.我们经常步行到学校。

They got to the top of the hill at noon.他们于中午到达了山顶。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.动词被动语态的结构和用法； 2.动词不定式的功能和用法； 3.本单元的词汇、短语和句型； 4.本单元学过的交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。【中考范例】

1.(2004年北京市中考试题)

Aunt Li often asks her son ________ too much meat.It’s bad for his health.A.don’t eat B.not to eat C.not eat D.to not eat

【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是动词不定式的构成和用法。这个句子的基本句型是ask sb.not to do sth.这里，not to eat 是不定式的否定式做宾语补足语。2.(2004年嘉兴市中考试题)

China is becoming stronger and stronger, so Chinese ________ in more American schools now.A.was taught B.is taught C.teaches D.taught 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是动词的语态和时态。Chinese 是一种语言，只能被人教，因此要用被动语态。又因为说的现在的情况，动词要用一般现在时。所以选B。3.(2004年河北省中考试题)

This painting ________ to a museum in New York in 1977.A.sells B.sold C.was sold D.is sold 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是动词的语态和时态。This painting只能被卖，所以用被动语态，又因为是1977年卖的，所以用一般过去时。4.(2004年扬州市中考试题)

---If you ________ a new idea, please call me as soon as possible.---Sure, I will.A.keep up with B.catch up with C.feed up with D.come up with 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是短语动词用法。本单元学习的短语动词come up with a new idea意思是想出新主意，正符合题意。

初三年级（下）【知识梳理】 I.重点短语

1.beg one's pardon 2.multiply …by… 3.slow down 4.wear out 5.try on

6.make a decision, 7.a place of interest 8.make a mistake 9.drop off

10.think about 11.make up one's mind, 12.at all, 13.at least 14.by the time 15.carry on 16.never mind 17.from now on 18.come down 19.hands up 20.before long，21.no one，22.not…any longer

II.重要句型

1.be busy doing sth.2.prefer to do sth.3.regard...as...4.be pleased with sth./sb.5.be angry with sb.III.交际用语

1.---How much does… cost …?

2.---It can cost as little as … yuan and as much as … yuan.3.---It costs ….4.---It's worth ….5.---I don't agree with ….6.---I wasn't sure whether….7.---I wonder if ….8.---What size …?

9.---Have you got any other colour / size / kind? 10.---Have you got anything cheaper? 11.---How much are they? 12.---How much does it cost? 13.---How much is it?

14.---That's a bit expensive.15.---Even though they're a little expensive, I'll take them.16.---I'll think about ….17.---I don't think I'll take ….18.---I like ….19.---I don't really like ….20.---Can I help you, girl?

21.---Would you like me to look in the back? 22.---We can find ….23.---Do you like being …?

24.---Can I ask you some questions? 25.---Sure.26.---It was great.27.---Wow!28.---Yeah!29.---Oh dear!30.---Hands up!

31.---I’ll shoot anyone who moves.32.---There’s no need to thank me.33.---Can you remember anything else about him? 34.---Come down, Polly!35.---There is a little traffic accident． 36.---There's a big traffic jam.37.---Well, I'm sure he'll be here before long.38.---I'm beginning to get angry with him!39.---Yes, we can't wait any longer.Let's go without him.40.---That's terrible!

41.---That's a really bad excuse!

IV.重要语法 1.过去将来时

2.过去完成时 3.动词不定式 4.定语从句 【名师讲解】

1.think/ think/about/ think of(1)think 单独使用时表示“思考”，接that 宾语从句时意为“认为”，“觉得”。

I am thinking how to work out the problem.I think she is a good student.当宾语从句含有否定概念时，通常形式上否定think，但意义上却是否定宾语从句。I don't think he can come.I don't think it will be windy.(2)think about 可接一个名词，动词-ing 形式或由疑问词引导的不定式或宾语从句，意思是“考虑„„”。

I have thought about it for a long time.Please think about how to tell her the bad news.(3)think of 表示“认为”，一般用于疑问句中，与what 连用。

What do you think of the TV play? = How do you like the TV play? 2.big/ large/ great 上述形容词都表示“大”，但侧重点及程度不同。

(1)big指具体事物的大小，强调比正常形体的标准大，既可用在普通场合，也可用在正式场合。它可用来指人的身材高大或“长大了”，还可表示“伟大”，“重要”之意。如：

Can you lift up this big stone?

On the last day I made a big decision.(2)large特别强调远远超过标准的大，指体积、面积、容积、数量之大。如： A whale is a large animal.A large crowd collected at the gate of the theatre.(3)great除了表示数量体积之大外，又指抽象的程度，意味着伟大性，重要性，优越性；常用于抽象

或无形的东西；用于有形的东西时，常带有“伟大”，“大得令人吃惊”等意思，含有一定的感情色彩。如：

China is a great country with a long history.He was one of the greatest scientists.3.cost/ take/ spend/ pay(1)cost表示“花钱”，花费，付出（只能用于钱、精力、生命等；主语必须是物。）The book cost me five yuan.(2)take的主语是动词不定式, 通常用it做形式主语。It took me five yuan to buy the book..(3)spend，在主动语句中主语是人I spent five yuan on(for)the book.或I spent five yuan(in)buying the book.(4)pay的主语是人。I paid five yuan for the book.4.expensive/ high/ cheap/ low 这四个词在谈论到价格的高低时，要注意使用。expensive与high涉及到价格“高”，而cheap 与low涉及到价格“低”。

(1)expensive昂贵的，花钱多的。这个单词若谈到“价格高，货贵”时其主语不能是价格，必须是货物、物品本身。如：This watch is expensive.这只表很贵。These glass-products are not expensive.这些玻璃制品不是很值钱。

注意：cheap表示“价廉”，“便宜的”，其主语也不能是价格，必须是物品本身。如： The cheap table was bought from him.这张便宜的桌子是他卖给我们的。This cloth doll is very cheap.这只布娃娃很便宜。

(2)high在表示价格时，含义是“高”，low在表示价格时，含义是“低”，这两个词不能用于物品本身，只

能用在价格上。如：The price of this watch is very high.这只表的价格太高了。The price of this book is not low for me.这本书的价格对我来说是不低。下面我们试看几个句子的正误对照：

The price of this computer is expensive.(宜改为：This computer is expensive.或The price of this computer is high.)The price of this pen is not cheap for him to buy.(宜改为：This pen is not cheap for him to buy.或 The price of this pen is not low for him.)5.alone/ lonely lonely 与alone的意思比较接近，但在使用时有所区别：(1)lonely用作形容词，意思是“孤单的；寂寞的”。可指心灵上的寂寞，也可指偏僻的地点。在句中既可作表语，也可作定语。(2)alone 可作形容词和副词，意思是“单独；独自”，不指心理上寂寞的感觉。

She was taken to a lonely island, lived alone, but she never felt lonely.她被带到一个荒岛上，自己居住，但她从不感到寂寞。6.before long/ long before(1)before long 作“不久以后”讲，切不要按字面译为“长时间以前”或“好久以前”。如： We hope to finish our experiment before long.我们希望不久（以后）就把实验做完。

(2)long before 作“很久以前”讲。原意为“„„以前很久”，故也可译为“老早”。long before 跟before long

不同，前者在其后面可以接名词或一个从句；当上下文明确时，名词或从句还可以省略。Before long 则没有上述搭配用法。They began the test yesterday, but we had made experiment long before.我们昨天开始做实验，但我们在那以前很久就已经做准备了。7.as/ when/ while(1)as 是连词，意思是“当„„的时候，一面„„一面”，（强调同时，一般连续时间不长），如：

As we were talking about Titanic, our teacher came in.正当我们谈论“泰坦尼克号”这部电影时，教师进来了。

The students sing as they go along.学生们边走边唱。

(2)When和as一样都是连词，注意它们的不同。如when“当„„的时候”（一般表示动作紧接着发生）；

“那时”（等立连词，前有逗号分开）I stayed till sunset, when it began to rain.我一直呆到太阳下山，那时天开始下雨了。(3)while是“当„„时候；和„„同时”（强调同时发生，一般连续时间较长）例如：While I was watching TV, he was reading.当我在看电视的时候，他正在看书。While there is life, there is hope.有生命就有希望。

8.beat/win/ hit

(1)beat 是动词，意思是“连续地打;打败;敲打”。beat后可接人或队名。意思是“击败对手。”如：

I can beat you at swimming.(2)win意思是“赢得某个项目”，后面常接“match, game”。如：He won a game.他胜一局。We won a match.我们比赛得胜。

(3)hit意思是“击中”（有时可表示“打一下”）。如：The mother hit her child out of anger.妈妈生气，打了她孩子一下。9.keep doing/keep on doing(1)keep doing侧重表示“持续不停地做某事”或“持续某种状态”。如：The girl kept crying all the time.那个女孩一直在哭。The baby kept sleeping about four hours.这个婴儿连续睡了大约四个小时。

(2)keep on doing 表示“总不断做某事”，不表示静止状态。不能与sitting, sleeping, lying, standing这类

词连用。如：It kept on raining for seven days.Don't keep on asking such silly questions.10.get/ turn/ become 这三个词都可作系动词用，表示状态的变化，后跟表语，但三个词的用法稍有不同。get强调情感、气候和环境的变化；turn强调色彩的变化；而become则强调职务、职称等的变化。如：

The days are getting shorter and shorter in winter．冬天的白天越来越短。She couldn't answer the question and her face turned red．她回答不出问题，脸红了。When did you become a teacher?-Ten years ago.你什么时候当的老师？十年前。11.steal / rob 从意思上讲steal表示偷窃的意思。而rob表示抢劫的意思；从搭配上来讲，steal sth from sb/sth;而rob则用rob sb/sth of sth;例如：He stole money from the rich to give it to the poor.They robbed the bank of one million dollars.12.see/look/watch/notice 在英语中，see，look，watch，notice都有“看”的意思，要注意他们的区别。see意为“看到”，表示视觉器官有意识或无意识地看到物体，强调“看到”的结果。look意为“看”，表示有意识地观看，强调“看”的动作。watch意为“观看，注视”，指以较大的注意力观看。notice意为“看到，注意到”，指有意识的注意，含有从不注意到注意的变化的意义。例如： What can you see in the picture？在图画中你能看到什么？ Look!How happily they are playing！看！他们玩得多高兴啊！He’s watched TV for over two hours．他看了两个多小时的电视。He noticed a purse lying on the road．他注意到地上有个钱包。13.Shoot/ shoot at shoot是及物动词，意思是“射中，射死”，宾语多为人或动物等。而shoot at是一个动词词组，意为“向„„射击”，至于射中或射死与否不得而知。如：

The man shot five birds in the forest．那个人在森林里射死（中）了五只鸟。The hunter shot at the bear．猎人朝熊射击了。They shot at the she－wolf，but didn't shoot her．他们向那只母狼射击，但是没有射中／死。14.escape/ run away(1)escape作“逃跑”、“逃脱”或“逃避”讲时，往往会有成功之意。如：The old man escaped death．那个老人死里逃生。The thief escaped from prison．那个小偷越狱了。

(2)run away作“逃跑”、“跑走”讲时，往往强调动作。如：Don't let him run away． 别让他跑了。

口语中escape和run away可以互用。15.so that..../ so...that....(1)so that....为了，以便。引导一个目的状语从句，从句中往往有情态动词。也可引导一个结果状语从句。如：

I left at 5:00 so that I could catch the early bus.Speak loudly, so that they can hear what you say.He didn't study English so that he lost a chance to work in a foreign company.(2)so...that....既可引导一个结果状语从句，也可引导一个目的状语从句。

如：The classroom was so noisy that I could hardly study.I got up so early in the morning that I could catch the train.【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.过去将来时；

2.过去完成时； 3.动词不定式； 4.定语从句；

5.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 6.本单元学过的交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。【中考范例】

1.(2004年济宁市中考试题)

He wanted to know ______________.A.whether he speaks at the meeting

B.when the meeting would start B.what he’s going to do at the meeting D.where would the meeting be held

【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序和时态。因为主句的时态是一般过去时，所以从句应用过去将来时，这就排除了A和B。宾语从句的时态应该是陈述句的语序，所以只有B是对的。

2.(2004年烟台市中考试题)

---Why didn’t you go to the movie yesterday?---Because I ___________ it before.A.had watched B.have seen C.have watched D.had seen 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是动词的搭配以及现在完成时和过去完成时的用法区别。看电影习惯商用see a movie, 又因为说的昨天以前发生的事情，应该用过去完成时。只有D正确。

3.(2004年重庆市中考试题)

---Did you win the football game?---Bad luck.Our team __________ in the final one.A.won B.beat C.was won D.was beaten 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是动词搭配和动词的语态。动词win通常和比赛一类的词连用，不与人或队连用，因此可以排除A和C。beat是个及物动词，既然我们的运气不好，就是输了，应该用被动语态。4.(2004年广州市中考试题)

---Who is the man ________ was talking to our English teacher?---Oh!It’s Mr Baker, our maths teacher.A.he B.that C.whom D.which 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是引导定语从句关系代词的选择。由于先行词是人，可以排除A和D。而该词在定语从句中作主语，只有B合适。

没事就用这些词练练你的嘴皮子~~

●说吧，你是想死呢还是不想活了？ ●好久没有人把牛皮吹的这么清新脱俗了！

●你给我滚，马不停蹄的滚……

●人人都说我丑，其实我只是美得不明显。

●无理取闹,必有所图！

_________________________________________________

●天被熬亮了。

第二篇：初一至初三全程英语知识点总结及练习

初一至初三全程英语知识点总结及练习

§299

seat/sit

Ⅰ.seat多用作名词。表“座位”，当它用作动词时表“坐、就座”，是及物动词，与反身代词连用。如：

①

Heseatedhimselfatadesk.他在桌旁坐下。

②

Pleasebeseated,gentlemen.请就座，各位先生。

③

Pleasegobacktoyourseat.请回到你的座位上去。

Ⅱ.sit为不及物动词。如：

①Sitdown,please.§300

seesbdoingsth/dosth

Ⅰ.seesbdoingsth.“看见某人正在做某事”，用动词的-ing形式作宾语补足语，表动作正在进行。

Ⅱ.seesbdosth.“见到某人做了某事”，表动作发生了，即动作的全部过程已经结束了。类似的动词还有：hear,feel,watch,等感官动词，及have,let,make等使役动词。如：

①Shesawaboygointoyourclassroom.她看见一个男孩进了人的教室。

②Isawhimwalkinginthestreet.我看见他正在街上散步。

③TheteacherheardjimreadingEnglishwhenshecamein.老师进来时，听见jim在读英语。

§301

so„that/such„that

Ⅰ.sothat可引导目的状语从句和结果状语从句，引导目的状语从句时，句中常有情态动词can,could等。如：

①

Theyclimbedhighersothattheymightseefarther.他们爬得更高，以便看得更远。

②

IgotupearlythismornignsothatIcaughtthefirstbus.今天早晨我起得很早，结果赶上了头班车。

Ⅱ.so„that“如此„„以致„„”，so是副词，在其后可跟形容词或副词，再跟that引导结果状语从句。如：

①

Hespokesofastthatnoonecouldunderstandhim.他说得太快，没人能听得懂。

②

TheT-shirtcostsolittlethatsheboughtseveral.那件T恤衫很便宜，她买了好几件。

Ⅲ.such„that与so„that同意。但such后跟名词或名词短语。如：

①

Sheissuchagirlthateveryonelikesher.她是个人人喜欢的女孩。

②

HemadesuchrapedprogressthatbeforelonghebegantowritearticlesinEnglishforanAmericannewspaper.他进步如此之快，以至于不久就开始用英语给一家美国报纸撰稿了。

[注]：如果名词前为many修饰时，用so而不用such.见下节例子。

§302

so/such

Ⅰ.两者都可以表“这样、如此”之意。So是副词，用来修饰形容词或副词。如：

①

Iamsogladtohearfrommyfriend.收到朋友的信我真高兴。

②

Hewritessowell.他写得这么好。

Ⅱ.Such是形容词，用来修饰单数可数名词，其后需加不定冠词a或an.如：

①

Hetoldussuchafunnystory.他给我讲了一个很有趣的故事。

②

youareinterestedinsuchthings.你对这样的事感兴趣。

[注意]：当单数可数名词前面有形容词修饰时，也可以有so,但要调整冠词的位置。

①

Hetoldussofunnyastory.他给我讲了一个如此有趣的故事。

如果被修饰的名词前有表“多”或“少”这两个意义的many,much,small和little时，用so而不用such.如：

①

Don’tbamehim.Heisjustsuchalittleboy.别责备他，他只是这么小的一个孩子。

②

wehavealongwaytogoyet,butthere

’ssolittlewaterleft.我们还有很长的路要走，但所剩的水已很少了。

§304

socks/stockings

Ⅰ.socks指不到膝盖的“短袜”如：

①

Heboughtapairofnylonsocks.他买了一双尼龙袜。

②

mysockshavebeendarned[da:nd]againandagain.我袜子已经一补再补。

Ⅱ.stockings指到膝盖或过膝盖的“长袜”。如：

①

Sheboughtapairofsilkstockings.她买了一双长丝袜。

§305

sometime/sometime/sometimes/sometimes

Ⅰ,sometime,是副词，意为“在某个时候”，可与将来时连用，也可以与过去时连用。如：

③

Hewasheresometimelastyear.去年某一时候他在此地。

④

weshallvisittheSciencemuseumsometimenextweek.我们将在下周的某一时候去参观科学馆。

Ⅱ.sometime是名词词组，意为“一段时间”。也可副词词组，用来指一个未肯定的时间，常指将来，可与sometime通用。

①

Istayedhereforsometime.我在这儿呆了一段时间。

②

Let’shavedinnersometimenextweek.下星期我们找个时间一块吃顿饭。

Ⅲ.sometimes.“有时、不时”，是频度副词，常与一般现在时或过去时连用。如：

②

Sometimestheymakemodesships.有时他们制作轮船模型。

Ⅳ.sometimes“几次、几倍”表次数或倍数。如：

①

wehavebeentheresometimes.我们去那儿几次了。

§306

sound/voice/noise

Ⅰ.sound“声音”，为最常用词，指可以听到的任何声音，强的，弱的，令人愉快的或不愉快的，有意义的或无意义的。如：

①

Iwasreadinglastnight,whensuddenlyIheardasoundinthenextroom.昨晚我正看书时，突然听到隔壁房间有声音。

②

Notasoundwasheard.听不到一点声音。

Ⅱ.noise常指太响或人们不愿听到的声音，“嘈杂声、喧闹声”。

①

Iamalwaysdisturbedbythenoiseofthetraffic.我老受到车辆噪声的打扰。

②

Theboysmadetoomuchnoise.孩子们太吵闹了。

Ⅲ.voice指“说话声”“唱歌声”“嗓音”如：

①

Thatsoundslikemary’svoice.那声音听起来好象玛丽的声音。

②

Shehaslosthervoice.她嗓子哑了。

§307

space/universe

Ⅰ.space“宇宙”指“空间，时间”如：

①

Theearthmovesthroughspace.地球在太空中运行。

②

Themoonisournearestneighbourinspaceandmenhavevisiteditalready.在宇宙里，月球是我们最近的邻居，人们已经访问过它了。

③

Thereisn

’tenoughspaceintheclassroomforthirtydesks.教室里没有足够的空间放三十张桌子。

Ⅱ.universe“宇宙”是世界上独一无二的。前要用定冠词the.除指时、空外，还指在时、空内万事万物。

①

ourworldisonlyasmallpartoftheuniverse.我们的世界只是宇宙的一小部分。

§308

steal/rob

Ⅰ.steal“偷”，指暗中盗取，句型为“steal+被盗物+from+被盗人或地点”。如：

①

Theircarwasstolen。他们的汽车被偷了。

②

Hestolesomemoneyfromher.他偷了她的钱。

Ⅱ.rob“抢劫”，指公然用暴力抢劫他人物品，句型为：“rob+被盗人或地点+of+被盗物”。如：

③

Theircarwasrobbed.他们的汽车被抢了。

④

Herobbedherofhermoney.他抢了她的钱。

[注]：和steal相关的名词是“thief”；和rob相关的名词是robber“强盗，盗贼”

§309

stopdoingsth/stoptodosth/

stopfromdoingsth

Ⅰ.stopdoingsth.“停止做某事”表停止正在做的事情。如：

①

Theystopedtalkingtome.他们中断了与我交谈。

②

Stoprunningabout.不要乱跑。

Ⅱ.stoptodosth.“停下来去做某事”即停止正在做的事，而去做另一件事。不定式为stop的目的状语。如：

③

Theystoppedtotalktome.他们停下来和我交谈。

④

Let’sstoptohavearest让我们停下来休息一会儿。

Ⅲ.stop.fromdoingsth.“阻止某人/物不要做某事”from可省略。=preventsb.fromdoingsth;keepsb.fromdoingsth.但keep~中的from不能省略。如：

⑤

wemuststophimdoingsuchafoolishthing.我们必须阻止他做这样的蠢事。

⑥

TheGreenGreatwallstoppedthewindblowingthesandtothefieldofthesouth.⑦

you’dbetterkeepthefire

你最好

§310

stop/station

Ⅰ.stop表“站”，一般指路途的公共汽车停靠点。

Ⅱ.station着重指车、船等的始发和终点站，范围较前者在。如：Thebusstopisinfrontofthestation.§311

subject/theme/topic

Ⅰ.subject“题目、科目”是应用最广泛的用语，可指讨论、研究、写作或艺术创作等的题目。如：

①

Let’schangethesubject.让我们改换话题吧。

②

Ihavestudiedthesubject.我研究过这个题目。

Ⅱ.theme“题目、主题”，尤指文学或艺术作品的主题。如：

①

Thestudentsarediscussingthethemeofanovel.学生们在讨论小说的主题。

②

waterfallsarefromveryearlytimesafavouritethemeforthepainter.瀑布很早就是画家喜爱的主题。

Ⅲ.topic“题目”指选定作为个人写篇或一些人进行讨论的题目。如：

① Thestudentswereaskedtowriteanessay[e

｀sei]ononeoftheassigned[ә｀saind]topies.要求学生根据指定题目当中的一题写。

②

Baseballistheirfavouritetopicofconversation.棒球运动是他们最喜好谈论的话题。

[注]：title

指书籍、诗歌、图画等的名称以及标题。

§312

surprise/surprising/surprised

Ⅰ.surprise作名词，意为“惊奇，诧异”。如：

①

Tomysurprise,theylost!使我惊奇的是他们输了！

②

Hesaidtomeinsurprise,“can’tyouskate?”他惊奇地对我说：“你不会滑冰”？

Ⅱ.surprise作及物动词，意为“使人惊奇，使感到意外”。如：①yousurpriseme.你真使我惊奇。

Ⅲ.surprising是现在分词作形容词用，意为“使惊奇的，出人意料的”，常指物。如：

Thesurprisingsuccessmakesusveryhappy.这出人意料的成功使我们非常高兴。

Ⅳ.surpised是过去分词作形容词用，指人“对。。。感到惊奇”。如：

we’resurprisedatyourwords.对你的话我们感到诧异。

[联想]现在分词作形容词表“进行”，“主动”的含意；而过去分词常表“完成”，“被动”的含意。类似的词还有exciting/excited;interesting/intereisted,relaxed/relaxing,如：

①

Iwassurprisedatthenews.我对这消息感到吃惊。

Thenewsissurprising.这消息令人感到惊奇。

②

weareallinterestedinheridea.我们对她的想法感兴趣。

Shehasaninterestingidea.她有一个有趣的想法。

§313

talkwith/talkof/talkon/talkabout

Ⅰ.talkwith后接的对象作宾语，介词with可用to代替。如：

①

Hewastalkingwith/toafriend.他在与一位朋友谈话。

Ⅱ.talkabout“谈论”，后接谈话的内容，宾语可以是人，也可以是物。如：

①

whatareyoutalkingabout?你们在谈论什么？

②

Let’snottalkaboutitnow.咱们别谈这事了。

Ⅲ.talkof“谈到、谈及”，与talkabout同义，只是talkof仅指“浅谈表面现象（如作者、书名等）”如：

①

weoftentalkofyou.我们常谈到你。

Ⅳ.talkon“论述”不仅指内容，而且还指评论。如：

①

Theyseldomtalkonpoliticsinthosedays.那时候他们很少谈论政治。

§314

telephone/ring/ringup

Ⅰ.telephone“打电话”是及物动词，后接名词、代词或从句。也可作不及物动词，其后用介词to再接宾语。它可缩略为phone.多用于口语中。如：

①

DidyoutelephoneLiLei?

②

Telephonemetomorrow.③

Hetelephonedthathecouldn’tattendthemeeting.Ⅱ.ring“打电话”可用作及物动词和不及物动词。如：

①

Hewantedyoutoringhim.他要你打电话给他。

此外：ringfor按铃叫（某人）；ringback回电话；ringoff挂断电话。

Ⅲ.ringup“给„„打电话”（=callup）如：

①Iwillringhimup.我会打电话给他。

§315

tellof/tellabout

一般情况下tellof可与tellabout换用。Tell之后常接表示人的名词或代词，介词of与about后接谈到的事情或内容。但在表示提起某事时倾向于tellof；在表示详细地讲述有关情况时，倾向于tellabout。如：

①

Haveyoutoldyourmotherofyouridea?你把比的想法告诉你母亲了吗？

②

Itoldheraboutthattheotherday.前些天我和她谈了这件事。

§316

thanksfor/thanksto

Ⅰ.thanksfor=thankyoufor“为„„谢”强调谢的原因。如：

①

Thanksforlendingmeyourumbrella.谢谢你借给我雨伞。

②

Thankyouforyourdictionary.谢谢你的字典。

Ⅱ.thanksto“多亏了„„”；“由于„„的帮助”相当于becauseof„或withthehelpof„,在此短语中，to是一个介词，后接名词或代词。如：

①

Thankstothedoctor,Iamwellagain.多亏这位医生，我身体又康复了。

②

Thankstoourteachers,weallpassedtheexam.多亏了老师的帮助，我们都及格了。

③

Thankstoyourhelp,Ifinishtheworkontime.多亏了你的帮助，我才能按时完成工作。

§317

that/who/which

Ⅰ.引导定语从句的关系代词有：who,whom,whose，which，that等。关系副词有：where（地点）when，why等。

Ⅱ.that在从句中指物，也可指人，可作主语和宾语。如：

①

waterthatispollutedoftencausesserousillness.受污染的水常会引起重病。（that在句中指物，用作主语）

②

Doyouhaveeverythingthatyouneed?你所需要的东西都有了吗？

③

Heisthemanthattheytalkedaboutjustnow.他时刚才他们谈论的那个人。

④

Doyouknowthemanthat/whospokejustnow?你认识刚才讲话的人吗？

Ⅲ.who和whom在句中指人，分别作主语和宾语。如：

①

Adoctorisapersonwholooksafterpeople’shealth.医生是保护人们健康的人。

②

IhavejustmetaladywhomIsawlastweek.我刚遇上一位我上星期见过的人。

Ⅳ.which在从句中指物，可作主语和宾语。如：

①

myauntwasnotonthetrainwhicharrivedjustnow.我阿姨不在刚才到达的那列火车上。

②

Thisisthecoatwhichyouwanted.这就是你要的那件外套。

Ⅴ.whose在从句中多指人，也可指物，用作定语。如：

①

youaretheonlyonewhoseadvicehemightlistento.只有你的话他可能听。

②

I’dlikearoomwhosewindowlooksoutoverthesea.我想要一个窗户面临大海的房间。

[注意]：在下述情况下，定语从句中关连词只能用that.:

Ⅰ

.先

行

词

是all,everything,nothing,something,anything,little,much等不定代词时，如：

①

onlyascientistcouldunderstandallthatthispursuitmeant.只有科学家知道这追求意味着什么。

②

Iamsureshehassomethingthatyoucanborrow.我相信她有你能借到的东西。

③

Everythingthatwesawwasofgreatinteresttous.我们对见到的一切都感兴趣。

④

ThereislittlethatIcanuse.我能用的东西几乎没有。

⑤

Hesawmuchthatwasbad.他见了很多坏东西。

[注]：①先行词是something时，关系代词用that或which都可以。

②

先

行

词

是

：someone,anyone,everyone,somebody,anybody,nobody,everybody时，关系代词用that或who都可以。

Ⅱ

.先

行

词

被all,every,veryno,some,any,little,much等修饰时，如：

①

Ihavereadallthebooksthatyougaveme.我把你给我的书全都看了。

②

Heistheverymanthatcamehereyesterday.他就是昨天来的人。

Ⅲ.先行词被序数词、形容词最高级修饰时。如：

①

ThisisthefirstcompositionthathehaswritteninEnglish.这是第一篇他用英语写的作文。

②

Thesmallestlivingthingsthatcanbeseenunderamicroscopearebateria.在显微镜下我们能看见的最小的东西是细菌。

③

¬ThisisthebestnovelthatIhaveeverread.这是我读过的最好的小说。

Ⅳ.先行词被theonly,thevery,thesame,thelast等修饰时。

①

ThatwhitefloweristheonlyonethatIreallylike.白花是我唯一真正喜欢的花。

②

ThisistheverybookthatIwanttofind.这正是我想要的书。

③

Thelastplacethatwevisitedwasthechemicalworks.我们最后参观的是化工厂。

Ⅴ.当有两个或两个以上分别表示人和物的先行词时，定语从句只能用that与主句连接，而不能用who/whom/which引导。如：

①

Hetalkedabouttheteachersandschoolsthathehadvisited

.他谈了关于他访问过的老师和学校的情况。

Ⅵ.当主句是以who或which开头的特殊疑问句时，关连词只能用that.而不能用who/whom/which.如：

①

whoisthepersonthatisstandingatthegate?站在门口的那人是谁。

②

whichofusthatknowssomethingaboutphysicsdoesnotknowthis?我们当中哪一个懂物理的人不知道这个？

[注]：在使用一些固定搭配的短语动词时，that与其它关系词有时可以互用，其介词不能提前，而必须放在动词之后，这时指物用that,which均可，指人时用who,whom,that均可.①Thisisthekeywhich/thatyouarelookingfor.②Heisamanyoucansafelydependon.他是你能依赖的人。

③

Thepersonwhom/that/whohelooksafterishismother.§318 thinkof/thinkabout/thinkover

Ⅰ.thinkof“想起、记起；有„„想法、看法；对„„有意见；考虑”如：

①willyouthinkofmeafterI’veleft?我离开后，你还会记着我吗？

②Iknowthepersonyoumean,butIcan’tthinkofhisname.我知道你讲的人是谁，但记不起他的名字。

④

wearethinkingofgoingtoSpainforourholidaythisyear.我们今年有到西班牙去休假的想法（打算）。

⑤

whatdoyouthinkofmynewdress?你认为我的新衣服怎么样？

⑥

Shethinksofnoonebutherself.她除自己外不考虑任何人。

Ⅱ.当它作“想到过去的某事”或“考虑到某事”解时，常与thinkabout通用。即：“„„考虑”；“对„„看法”

①

wehavemanythingstothinkof/aboutbeforegoingthere.在动身去那之前，我们还有许多事情要考虑。

②

见Ⅰ④

Ⅲ.thinkabout可以表“想、回想”着重于想的过程。如：

①

IamthinkingaboutthefriendsIhavelost.我正在回想那些失去了的朋友。

[注]：thinkof可以表“想象一下，想想”而thinkabout则不能。—→Thinkofyourmother!想想你的母亲吧！

—→Thinkofthedanger!想象一下危险吧！

Ⅳ.thinkover“仔细考虑”其中over是副词。如：

①Iwillthinkthethingover.我要把这事仔细考虑一下。

§319

thinkmuchof/thinkhighlyof/

thinklittleof/singhighpraiseof/speakhighlyof

Ⅰ.speakhighlyof“高度评价，赞扬”，相当于thinkhighlyof如：

①

ourheadmasterspokehighlyofmyclassmatesatthemeeting.我们校长在会上高度赞扬了我班的同学。

②

ThepeoplespeakhighlyoftheTVplay.人们对这部电视剧评价很高。

[注]speak构成的短语：

speakEnglish讲英语（某种语言）；speaktosb.和某人交谈；

speakwell/illof说„„的好/坏话；speaklikeabook大胆地说

speakforoneself为自己辩护。

Ⅱ.thinkmuchwellof“对„„印象很好”如：

①

weallthinkwellofyoursuggestion.我们都认为你的建议很好。

Ⅲ.thinklittle/poorly/badlyof“对„„印象不好”如：

①

youthoughtverybadlyofhimatfirst,didn’tyou?起初你对他印象很坏，是吧？

Ⅳ.thinkmuchof“比„„更看重（考虑得多）”如：

①

Hethoughtmoreofhealththanofmoney.和金钱相比他更看重健康。

Ⅴ.singhighpraisefor“高度赞扬某人/某物”

§320

till/until

till和until都可作介词或连词，其用法有两种：

Ⅰ.在肯定句中，意为“到„„为止”谓语动词一般要求是延续的。如：

①

Ishallstayheretill/untilnextday.我将留在这儿一直到下星期天。

Ⅱ.在否定句中，意为“直到„„才„„”，表这个动词的动作直到till/until所表示的时间才发生。如：

①

Theyarenotgoingbacktoworkuntil/tilltheygetmoremoney.他们要等到增加了工资才复工。

§321

todosth/doingsth

动词不定式与动词的ing形式，都是非谓语动词。一般地，不定式表示：具体的，某一次特定的或将来的行为。而动词的-ing形式则表示：抽象的，一般地，具有普遍性的，或正在进行的行为。在句中都能作：主语，宾语，定语，状语，宾补等。如：

①

Ilikeswimming,butIdn’tliketogotoday.我喜欢游泳，但今天我不想去。

[注]：下列动词接todosth.和doingsth的不同意义：

．

2．3．

4．5．

6．7．

§322

towards/to/for

Ⅰ.for“向„„”，接在leave,start,depart等动词之后，表方向。如：

①

SheisleavingforBeijing.她将动身到北京去。

Ⅱ.towards仅表“方向”，比for的意味要强。如：

①

Heiscomingtowardsthehouse.他向这房子走来。

Ⅲ.to“向，朝„„”表目的地。接在动词come,go,return,proceed,move,march等后。如：

①

Let’sgotoyangzhoubysteamer.让咱们乘船去杨州吧！

②

SoonafterhisreturntoEngland,hisfatherdied.当他回英国不久后，他的父亲便去世了。

§323

treat/heal

二者都是动词，treat意为“治疗”，强调用药物或医疗手段医治的过程，并不表示治疗了效果。heal意为“治愈”，指医好伤病。如：

①

Thedentististreatinghisteeth.牙医在为他治牙。

②

Thedoctorhealedmyburns.医生治好了我的烧伤。

§324

usedtodosth/beusedtodoingsth/

beusedtodosth/would

Ⅰ.Usedtodosth.“过去常常做某事”（现在不做了），只用于过去时态。如：

①

Heusedtogetupearly.过去他常早起。（现在已不这样了）

②

HermotherusedtogoshoppingonFridays,butnowshedoesitonSunday.她母亲过去常在周五去购物，但现在她周日去了。

Ⅱ.Beusedtosth.“习惯于做某事”，beused是被动语态结构。可用于现在、过去、将来多种时态。Be可用get,become等代替。如：

①

Hewillbe/hasbeenusedtogettingupearly.他将会/已经习惯于早起。

Ⅲ.Beusedtodosth.“被用于做某事”，beused是被动语态结构，其中不定式表目的，可用于多种时态。如：

①

woodisusedtomakepaper.木材用来造纸。

[注]：usedto的否定式有两种：一是：usednotto二是：didn’tuseto如： ①myfatherusednottosmoke.=myfatherdidn

’tusetosmoke.我爸爸过去不抽烟。

② Theyusednottoliveinthecountry.=Theydidn

’tusetoliveinthecountry.其疑问式是将used提前，或添加助动词did.Ⅳ.would是情态动词，没有象usedto那样，有过去和现在的对比。不能说明是否现在还做不做。

§325very/right/just

Ⅰ.right“正好”“就”“立刻”等。如：

①

mikelivesrightoppositethestreet.麦克就住在街对面。

②

There’sabigstonerightinthemiddleoftheroad.路正中有块在石头。

③

Lilymetanaccidentrighthere.莉莉就是在这儿出事的。

④

She’llberightback.她马上就回来。

Ⅱ.just作为副词，常用在祈使句前以加强语气。如：

①

justthinkoftheresult.试想一下后果吧。

②

justtouchit.你摸摸吧。

③

justwaitamoment,please.请稍等。

Ⅲ.very作为形容词，常与the,this或my,your等连用，以加强语气，表“正是那个”“恰好的”等。如：

①

youaretheverypersonI’mlookingfor.你正是我要找的人。

②

Thetwomenfoughtonthisveryspot.那两个男子就是在这个地方打起来的。

§326

whynot/whydon’t

此两者都是表建议的句型，一般可以代换。类似的还有：

▲

Let’s„

▲

ShallI/we„?

▲

How/whatabout„?

Ⅰ.whynot“好的、可以呀、为什么不可以呢？”如：

①--mum,mayIgoouttoplaybasketballnow?–whynot?

③

whynotaskyourteacher?怎么不去问一问你的老师呢？

此外还可表一种不可理解的心情：

①--Iwon’tseethefilmagain.–whynot? Ⅱ.whydon’t

是一种友好的建议（afriendlysuggestion）.无论在什么场合，使用起来十分亲切。后面接主语。如：

①

whydon’tyougoswimming?为什么不去游泳呢？

②

whydon’tIgiveLilysomecolourfulpencils?我给莉莉一些彩笔，好吗？

§327

work/job

Ⅰ.job“工作”，既可指固定的工作，也可指临时的或某项具体的工作，是可数名词，前面可用不定冠词a,也可以有复数形式。如：

①

johnlosthisjob.john失业了。

②

Therewerejustnotenoughjobs.没有那么多的工作（可干）。

③

Tom’sfatherislookingforajob.Ⅱ,work是个普通用词，泛指一切工作，是不可数名词。如：

①

Ihavealotofworktothisevening.教师的工作就是教学。

②

Ateacher’sworkisteaching.老师的工作就是教学。

[联想]：搭配

apply/hungforajob.求职

get/findajob.找到一份工作

loseone’sjob。失业

performoddjob.打零工

quitajob.辞职

have/workasidejob兼职

takeapart-time/full-timejobinadepartmentstore.在百货公司担任兼职或专职工作。

§328

workat/workon/workout

Ⅰ.workat与workon都可以作“从事于”，后接名词、代词、或动词-ing形式作宾语。workat侧重于表示所从事的工作和性质，而不在于说明正在做什么。此时可将workat译为“学习，研究，写作，致力于”等。如：

①

Theyhaveworkedatthissubjectformanyyears.他们研究这个课题已经有好多年了。

②

Heisworkingatanewinvention.他正致力于一项新的发明。

Ⅱ.workon侧重于表示“从事某项工作”。可将它译为“造；创作；画；做„„”。宾语为其具体的对象。常用于进行时态和完成时态。还可表示：“继续工作；对„„起作用”如：

①

we’reworkingonsomewood-cuts.他们正在创作一些木刻作品。

②

Hehasbeenworkingonthispaintingfordays.这张画他已画了好些天了。

③

Theywillworkontillsunset.他们将继续工作，直到日落。

④

Thismedicinewillworkontheaffectedpart.这药能对患部起作用。

§329

worth/worthy

Ⅰ.worth可用作名词或形容词，作名词时，意为“价值”，无复数形式；也可解作“值一定金额的数量”如：

①

Nobodyknewthetrueworthofhiswork.没有人知道他的工作的真实价值。

②

Givemeoneyuan’sworthofapples.给我一元钱的苹果。

▲

worth作形容词时，只能用作表语，不能作定语，其后常跟钱数或相当于钱的词，表示：“值多少钱”；跟动词的-ing形式，表示“值得（做）„„”。如：

③

Thedictionaryisworth5yuan.这本字典值5元钱。

④

Theplayisworthseeing.这场戏值得一看。

Ⅱ.worthy是形容词，意为“值得”，主要用作表语，后跟of，再接名词或动词-ing的被动形式。worthy后也可跟不定式。如表被动意思须接不定式的被动语态。如：

①

Sheisworthyofhelp.她值得帮助。

②

Thewatchisworthyofbeingbought.这块表值得买

③

Thequestionisworthytobediscussed.这个问题值得讨论。

第三篇：2018年最新版初中英语初一至初三全程知识点总结

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

初中英语初一至初三全程知识点总结

丹凤县龙驹中学

张增

2018年5月24日

初一年级（上）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.sit down 2.on duty 3.in English 4.have a seat 5.at home 6.look like 7.look at 8.have a look 9.come on 10.at work 11.at school 12.put on 13.look after 14.get up 15.go shopping II.重要句型 1.help sb.do sth.2.What about…? 3.Let’s do sth.4.It’s time to do sth.5.It’s time for …

6.What’s…? It is…/ It’s… 7.Where is…? It’s….8.How old are you? I’m….9.What class are you in? I’m in….10.Welcome to….11.What’s …plus…? It’s….12.I think…

13.Who’s this? This is….14.What can you see？ I can see….15.There is(are)….16.What colour is it(are they)? It’s(They’re)… 17.Whose …is this? It’s….18.What time is it? It’s….III.交际用语

1.Good morning, Miss/Mr….2.Hello!Hi!All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

3.Nice to meet you.Nice to meet you, too.4.How are you? I’m fine, thank you/thanks.And you? 5.See you.See you later.6.Thank you!You’re welcome.7.Goodbye!Bye!8.What’s your name? My name is ….9.Here you are.This way, please.10.Who’s on duty today? 11.Let’s do.12.Let me see.IV.重要语法

1.动词be的用法；

2.人称代词和物主代词的用法； 3.名词的单复数和所有格的用法； 4.冠词的基本用法； 5.There be句型的用法。【名师讲解】 1.in/on

在表示空间位置时，in表示在某个空间的范围以内，on表示在某一个物体的表面之上。例如：

There is a bird in the tree.树上有只鸟。

There is a picture on the wall.墙上有张图。2.this/that/these/those(1)this常常用来指在时间、地点上更接近讲话人的人和事，these是this的复数形式。that常常用来指在时间、地点上离讲话人更远一点的人和事，those是that的复数形式。例如：

You look in this box and I’ll look in that one over there.你看看这个盒子，我去看那边的那个盒子。

I want this car, not that car.我想要这辆小汽车，不是那一辆。

Take these books to his room, please.请把这些书拿到他房间去。

This is mine;that’s yours.这个是我的，那个是你的。

These are apples;those are oranges.这些是苹果，那些是橘子。

(2)在打电话的用语中，this常常指的是我，that常常指的是对方。例如：

This is Mary speaking.Who’s that? 我是玛丽。你是谁？ 3.There be/ have There be “有”，其确切含意为“某处或某时存在某人或某物”。其结构是：There be + 某人或某物 + 表示地点或时间的状语。There be 后面的名词实际上是主语，be 动词的形式要和主语在数上保持一致，be动词后面的名词是单数或不可数名词时用is，名词是复数时用are。例如：(1)There is a big bottle of coke on the table.桌上有一大瓶子可乐。(2)There is a doll in the box.那个盒子里有个娃娃。

(3)There are many apples on the tree.那树上有许多苹果。

总之，There be结构强调的是一种客观存在的“有”。have表示“拥有，占有，具有”，即：某人有某物(sb.have / has sth.)。主语一般是名词或代词，与主语是所属关系。例如：(4)I have two brothers and one sister.我有两个兄弟，一个姐姐。(5)That house has four rooms.那所房子有四个房间。4.look/ see/ watch

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

(1)look 表示“看、瞧”，着重指认真看，强调看的动作，表示有意识地注意看，但不一定看到，以提醒对方注意。，如：

Look!The children are playing computer games.瞧！孩子们在玩电脑游戏。Look!What’s that over there? 看！那边那个是什么？

单独使用是不及物动词，如强调看某人/物，其后接介词at，才能带宾语，如： He’s looking at me。他正在看着我。

(2)see强调“看”的结果，着重的是look这个动作的结果，意思是“看到”，see是及物动词，后面能直接跟宾语。如：

What can you see in the picture? 你能在图上看到什么？

Look at the blackboard.What did you see on it?看黑板！你看到了什么？

(3)watch“观看，注视”，侧重于场面，表示全神贯注地观看、观察或注视某事务的活动，强调过程，常用于“看电视、看足球、看演出”等。如：

Yesterday we watched a football match on TV.昨天我们从电视上看了一场足球比赛。4.put on/ / in

put on意为“穿上，戴上”。主要指“穿上”这一动作, 后面接表示服装、鞋帽的名词。in 是介词，表示“穿着”强调状态。在句中可以做定语、标语和状语。如： It’s cold outside, put on your coat.外面冷，穿上你的外衣。He puts on his hat and goes out.他戴上帽子，走了出去。

The woman in a white blouse is John’s mother.穿白色衬衣的那个妇女是John的妈妈。5.house/ home/family house ：“房子”，指居住的建筑物;Home: “家”，指一个人同家人共同经常居住的地方;Family: “家庭“，“家庭成员”。例如：

Please come to my house this afternoon.今天下午请到我家来。He is not at home.他不在家。

My family all get up early.我们全家都起得很早。6.fine, nice, good, well

四者都可用作形容词表示“好”之意，但前三者既可作表语又可作定语，而后者仅用作表语。主要区别在于：

(1)fine指物时表示的是质量上的“精细”，形容人时表示的是“身体健康”，也

可以用来指“天气晴朗”。例如：

Your parents are very fine.你父母身体很健康。That's a fine machine.那是一台很好的机器。

It's a fine day for a walk today.今天是散步的好时候。

(2)nice主要侧重于人或物的外表，有“美好”，“漂亮”的意思，也可用于问候或赞扬别人。例如： Lucy looks nice.露西看上去很漂亮。

These coats are very nice.那些裙子很好看。Nice to meet you.见到你很高兴。It's very nice of you.你真好。

(3)good形容人时指“品德好”，形容物时指“质量好”，是表示人或物各方面都好的普通用语。例如： Her son is a good student.她儿子是一个好学生。The red car is very good.那辆红色小汽车很好。

(4)well只可用来形容人的“身体好”，但不能作定语，它也能用作副词作状语，多放在所修饰的动词之后。例如：

I'm very well, thanks.我身体很好，谢谢。My friends sing well.我的朋友们歌唱得好。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.动词be的用法；

2.人称代词和物主代词的用法； 3.名词的单复数和所有格的用法； 4.冠词的基本用法； 5.There be句型的用法。

初一年级（下）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.a bottle of 2.a little 3.a lot(of)4.all day 5.be from 6.be over 7.come back 8.come from 9.do one’s homework 10.do the shopping 11.get down 12.get home 13.get to 14.get up 15.go shopping 16.have a drink of 17.have a look 18.have breakfast 19.have lunch 20.have supper 21.listen to 22.not…at all 23.put…away 24.take off 25.throw it like that 26.would like 27.in the middle of the day 28.in the morning / afternoon/ evening 29.on a farm 30.in a factory II.重要句型 1.Let sb.do sth.2.Could sb.do sth.? All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

3.would like sth.4.would like to do sth.5.What about something to eat? 6.How do you spell …? 7.May I borrow…? III.交际用语

1.—Thanks very much!—You're welcome.2.Put it/them away.3.What's wrong? 4.I think so.I don't think so.5.I want to take some books to the classroom.6.Give me a bottle of orange juice, please.Please give it / them back tomorrow.OK.9.What's your favourite sport? 10.Don't worry.11.I’m(not)good at basketball.12.Do you want a go? 13.That's right./ That‘s all right./ All right.14.Do you have a dictionary / any dictionaries? Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.15.We / They have some CDs.We / They don’t have any CDs.16.---What day is it today / tomorrow?---It’s Monday.17.---May I borrow your colour pens, please?---Certainly.Here you are.18.---Where are you from?---From Beijing.19.What's your telephone number in New York? 20.---Do you like hot dogs?---Yes, I do.(A little./ A lot./ Very much.)---No, I don't.(I don't like them at all.)21.---What does your mother like?---She likes dumplings and vegetables very much.22.---When do you go to school every day?---I go to school at 7:00 every day.23.---What time does he go to bed in the evening?---He goes to bed at 10:00.IV.重要语法

1.人称代词的用法； 2.祈使句；

3.现在进行时的构成和用法；

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

4．动词have的用法；

5．一般现在时构成和用法；

6．可数名词和不可数名词的构成和用法 【名师讲解】

1.That's right./ That‘s all right./ All right.That’s right意为“对的”，表示赞同对方的意见、看法或行为，肯定对方的答案或判断。例如： “I think we must help the old man.”“我想我们应该帮助这位老人。” “That's right.”或 “You're right.”“说得对”。

That’s all right.意为“不用谢”、“没关系”，用来回答对方的致谢或道歉。例如： “Many thanks.” “That's all right.” “Sorry.It's broken.” “That's all right.” All right.意为“行了”、“可以”，表示同意对方的建议或要求。有时还可以表示“身体很好” “Please tell me about it.” “请把此事告诉我。” “All right.”“好吧。” Is your mother all right?你妈身体好吗 2.make/do 这两个词都可以解释为“做”，但含义却不同，不能混用。make指做东西或制东西，do指做一件具体的事。Can you make a paper boat for me? 你能为我做个纸船吗？ He’s doing his homework now.他正在做他的作业。3.say/speak/talk/tell say：是最口语化的最普通的一个词，意为“说出”、“说道”，着重所说的话。如：

“I want to go there by bus” , he said.他说，“我要坐汽车到那里去。” Please say it in English.请用英语说。

speak : “说话”，着重开口发声，不着重所说的内容，一般用作不及物动词(即后面不能直接接宾语)。如：

Can you speak about him? 你能不能说说他的情况？ I don’t like to speak like this.我不喜欢这样说话。

speak 作及物动词解时，只能和某种语言等连用，表达在对话中恰当使用词汇的能力。如： She speaks English well.她英语说得好。talk : 与 speak 意义相近，也着重说话的动作，而不着重所说的话，因此，一般也只用作不及物动词，不过，talk 暗示话是对某人说的，有较强的对话意味，着重指连续地和别人谈话。如： I would like to talk to him about it.我想跟他谈那件事。

Old women like to talk with children.老年妇女喜欢和孩子们交谈。tell : “告诉”，除较少情况外，一般后面总接双宾语。如： He’s telling me a story.他在给我讲故事。tell a lie 撒谎

tell sb.to do sth./tell sb.not to do sth.Miss Zhao often tells us to study hard.4.do cooking/ do the cooking do cooking 作“做饭”解，属泛指。do the cooking 特指某一顿饭或某一家人的饭。cooking为动名词，不能用作复数，但前面可用 some, much修饰。从do some cooking可引出许多类似的短语： do some washing 洗些衣服 do some shopping 买些东西 do some reading 读书

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

do some writing 写些东西 do some fishing 钓鱼

从以上短语可引申出另一类短语，不能用some, much或定冠词。go shopping 去买东西 go fishing 去钓鱼 go boating 去划船 go swimming 去游泳

5.like doing sth./ like to do sth.like doing sth.与like to do sth.意思相同，但用法有区别。前者强调一般性的爱好或者表示动作的习惯性和经常性；后来表示一次性和偶然性的动作。例如：

He likes playing football, but he doesn‘t like to play football with Li Ming.他喜欢踢足球，但是他不喜欢和李明踢。6.other/ others/ the other/ another other表其余的，别的，Have you any other questions?你还有其他问题吗? others 别的人，别的东西

In the room some people are American, the others are French.在屋子里一些人是 美国人,其他的是法国人。

the other表另一个（二者之中）one…，the other…

One of my two brothers studies English, the other studies Chinese.我两个哥哥中的一个学习英文,另一个学中文。another表三者以上的另一个，另一些

There is room for another few books on the shelf.书架上还可以放点书。7.in the tree/ on the tree in the tree 与 on the tree.译成中文均为“在树上”但英语中有区别。in the tree表示某人、某事（不属于树本身生长出的别的东西）落在树上，表示树的枝、叶、花、果等长在树上时，要使用on the tree.如：

There are some apples on the tree.那棵树上有些苹果。

There is a bird in the tree.那棵树上有只鸟。8.some/ any

(1)some和 any既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。但有以下两点需要

注意。

some常用于肯定句中，any常用于否定句和疑问句中。如： There is some water in the glass.Is there any water in the glass? There isn't any water in the glass.(2)在说话者希望得到肯定答复的一般疑问句中，或在表示请求，邀请的疑问句中，我们依然用some。如： Would you like some tea? 9.tall/ high

(1)说人，动物，树木等有生命的东西，主要用tall，不用high，例如

a tall woman 一个高个子妇女

a tall horse 一个高大的马

(2)说一个不与地面接触的人和物的高时，要用high，而不用tall，比如人站在桌子上时，飞机飞上天时，例如：

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

He is high up in the tree.他高高地爬在树上。

The plane is so high in the sky.飞机在空中这么高。

(3)指建筑物、山时要tall或high都可以，不过high的程度比tall高。

(4)high可作副词，tall不能。

(5)tall的反义词为short, high的反义词为low.10.can/ could(1)can表示体力和脑力方面的能力，或根据客观条件能做某种动作的“能力 ”。例如：

Can you ride a bike？ 你会骑自行车吗？

What can I do for you？ 要帮忙吗？

Can you make a cake？你会做蛋糕吗？

(2)can用在否定句和疑问句中时有时表示说话人的“怀疑”“猜测”或不肯定。例如： Where can he be？他会在什么地方呢？

Can the news be true？这个消息会是真的吗？

It surely can't be six o'clock already？不可能已经六点钟了吧？

You can't be hungry so soon，Tom，you've just had lunch.汤姆，你不可能饿得这么快，你刚吃过午饭。What can he mean？他会是什么意思？

在日常会话中，can可代替may表示“允许”，may比较正式。例如： You can come in any time.你随时都可以来。---Can I use your pen？我能用你的钢笔吗？---Of course，you can.当然可以。

You can have my seat，I'm going now.我要走了，你坐我的座位吧。(3)could could 是 can的过去式，表示过去有过的能力和可能性（在否定和疑问句中）。例如：

The doctor said he could help him.（能力）医生说他能帮助他。

Lily could swim when she was four years old.（能力）

当丽丽四岁的时候她就会游泳。

At that time we thought the story could be true.（可能性）那时我们以为所说的可能是真的。

could可代替can表示现在时间的动作，但语气较为婉转。例如： Could I speak to John，please？我能和约翰说话吗？

Could you？在口语中表示请求对方做事。例如： Could you wait half an hour？请你等半个小时好吗？

Could you please ring again at six？六点钟请你再打电话好吗？(4)can的形式

只有现在式can和过去式could两种形式。能表示一般现在和一般过去两种时态，有时也能表示将来。所有其他时态（包括将来时）须用be able to加动词不定式来表示。例如：

They have not been able to come to Beijing.他们没有能到北京来。11.look for/ find look for 意为“寻找”，而find意为“找到，发现”，前者强调“找”这一动作，并不注重“找”的结果，而后者则强调“找”的结果。例如：

She can’t find her ruler.她找不到她的尺子啦。

Tom is looking for his watch，but he can’t find it.汤姆正在寻找他的手表，但没能找到。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

12.be sleeping/ be asleep be sleeping 表示动作，意思是“正在睡觉”；be asleep 表示状态，意思是“睡着了”。如：---What are the children doing in the room? 孩子们在房间里做什么？---They are sleeping.他们正在睡觉。

The children are asleep now.现在孩子们睡着了。13.often/ usually/sometimes often表示“经常”，sometimes表示“有时候”，在表示发生频率上often要高于usually，usually要高于sometimes。这三个词表示的是经常性，一般性的动作或情况，常与一般现在时连用，常位于主要谓语动词的前面，其他谓语动词（be动词，情态动词和助动词）的后面，有时也可位于句尾。如果要加强语气，则放在句首。

We usually play basketball after school.我们通常放学后打篮球。Sometimes I go to bed early.有时，我睡觉很早。

He often reads English in the morning.他经常在早晨读英语。14.How much/ How many how much常用来询问某一商品的价格，常见句式是How much is / are…? How much is the skirt? 这条裙子多少钱？ How much are the bananas? 这些香蕉多少钱？

how much后加不可数名词，表示数量，意为“多少“，how many后加可数名词的复数形式。How much meat do you want? 你要多少肉呀？

How many students are there in your class? 你们班有多少人？ 15.be good for/ be good to/ be good at be good for 表示“对……有好处”，而be bad for表示“对……有害”；be good to表示“对……友好”，而be bad to表示“对……不好”；be good at表示“擅长，在……方面做得好”，而be bad at表示“在……方面做得不好”。

Doing eye exercises is good for your eyes.做眼保健操对你的眼睛有好处。

Eating too much is bad for you health.吃的太多对你的身体有害。

Miss Li is good to all of us.李老师对我们所有的人都很友好。

The boss is bad to his workers.这个老板对他的工人不好。

Li Lei is good at drawing, but I'm bad at it.李雷擅长画画，但是我不擅长。16.each/ every each 和every都有“每一个”的意思，但含义和用法不相同。each从个体着眼，every从整体着眼。each 可用于两者或两者以上，every只用于三者或三者以上。

We each have a new book.我们每人各有一本新书。

There are trees on each side of the street.街的两旁有树。

He gets up early every morning.每天早晨他都起得早。

each可以用作形容词、副词和代词；every只能用作形容词。Each of them has his own duty.他们各人有各人的义务。

They each want to do something different.他们每个人都想做不同的事情。17.一般现在时/现在进行时

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

一般现在时表示经常性的或习惯性的动作或存在的状态，也表示说话者的能力，还有自然现象；而现在进行时表示正在进行或发生的动作（构成方式为am/is /are/+doing）。I do my homework in the evening.我在晚上做作业。

I'm doing my homework now.我现在正在做作业。

现在进行时常与now, these days, at the moment 或Look, listen等词连用；而一般现在时常与often, always, sometimes, usually, every day, in the morning, on Mondays等连用。We often clean the classroom after school.我们经常放学后打扫教室。

Look!They are cleaning the classroom.看！他们正在打扫教室呢。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在：

动词一般现在时和现在进行时的用法，人称代词的用法，可数名词和不可数名词的构成和用法。

初二年级（上）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.on time 2.best wishes 3.give a talk 4.for example 5.short for 6.a waste of time 7.go on a field trip 8.go fishing 9.I agree 10.next week 11.the day after tomorrow 12.have a picnic 13.have some problems doing sth.14.go the wrong way 15.hurry up 16.get together 17.in the open air 18.on Mid-Autumn Day 19.come over 20.have to 21.get home 22.agree with 23.in the country 24.in town 25.all the same All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

26.in front of 27.on the left/right side 28.next to 29.up and down 30.keep healthy 31.grow up 32.at the same time 33.the day before yesterday 35.last Saturday 36.half an hour ago 37.a moment ago 38.just now 39.by the way 40.all the time 41.at first II.重要句型

1.have fun doing sth.2.Why don’t you…? 3.We’re going to do sth.4.start with sth.5.Why not…?

6.Are you going to…? 7.be friendly to sb.8.You’d better do sth.9.ask sb.for sth.10.say goodbye to sb.11.Good luck(with sb)!III.交际用语

1.Welcome backto school!2.Excuse me.I’m sorry I’m late, because the traffic is bad.3.It doesn’t matter.4.Happy Teachers’ Day!5.That’s a good idea.6.What are you going to do？ 7.Where are we going ? 8.What are we going to do ? 9.I’m good at…

10.It’s not far from…

11.Are you free tomorrow evening? 12.Would you and Lily like to come over to my home for Mid-Autumn Festival? 13.I’m glad you can come.14.Thanks for asking us.15.How about another one? 16.May I have a taste? All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

17.Let me walk with you.18.What do you have to do? 19.Do you live on a farm? 20.Which do you like better, the city or the country? 21.Which do you like best, dogs, cats or chickens? 22.Shall we go at ten? Good idea!23.---Let’s make it half past one.---OK.24.---Why not come a little earlier?---All right.25.Excuse me.Where’s the nearest post office, please? 26.It’s over there on the right.27.I’m sorry I don’t know.28.You’d better…

29.Thank you all the same.30.Which bus do I take? 31.Go along this road.32.What day was it yesterday? 33.I’m sorry to hear that.34.I hope you’re better now.35.Why did you call me? 36.I called to tell… IV.重要语法

1.be going to的用法；

2.形容词的比较级、最高级； 3.形容词和副词的比较 4.一般过去时 【名师讲解】

1.on the street / in the street 表示“在街上”时，on the street 和 in the street 都可以，在美国多用on the street, 在英国多用in the street.例如：

We have a house in the street.我们在街上有座房子。I met him on the street.我在街上遇见了他。2.would like / like

would like 和 like含义不同。like 意思是“喜欢”，“爱好”，而 would like 意思是“想要”。试比较：

I like beer.=I’m fond of beer.我喜欢喝啤酒。

I’d like a glass of beer= I want a glass of beer.我想要一杯啤酒。

Do you like going to the cinema? 你喜欢看电影吗？

Would you like to go to the cinema tonight? 你今晚想去看电影吗？ 3.another / the other(1)another 通常用于三个或三个以上或不确定数量中的任意一个人或 物体。例如： May I have another apple, please? 请在给我一个苹果好吗？

This coat is too small for me.Please show me another这件外套我穿太小，请再给我拿一件看看。

(2)the other 通常指两者中的另一个。例如：

He has two rulers.One is short.The other is long.他有两把尺子，一把短的，另一把长的。

I have two brothers.One works in Xi’an.The other works in Beijing.我有两个兄弟，一个在西安工作，另All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

一个在北京工作。4.have to /must

(1)have to和 must 都可以用来谈论义务，但用法略有不同。如果某人主观上觉得必须去做而又想去时，常用must。如果谈论某种来自“外界”的义务，常用have to。例如： I must stop smoking.我必须戒烟。（自己想戒烟）They have to work for the boss.他们不得不为那个老板工作。（条件逼得他们去工作）

(2)have to 可用于多种时态，must 只能用于一般现在时。例如： I’ll have to get up early tomorrow morning.明天早晨我必须早早起床。We had to work long hours every day in order to get more money.为了多挣钱，我们不得不每天长时间地工作。

(3)用于否定句时，mustn’t意思是“决不能”，“禁止”，而don’t have to意思是“不必”，相当于needn’t。例如：

You mustn’t be late again next time.下一次你决不能再迟到。

You don’t have to go there today.You can go there tomorrow.你今天不必到那里去了。你可以明天去。5.hear sb.or sth.doing sth./ herar sb.or sth.do sth.hear sb.or sth.doing sth.意思是“听到某人或某物在做某事”，而hear sb.or sth.do sth.意思是“听到某人或某物做过某事”。试比较：

I hear him singing an English song.听见他在唱英歌曲。I heard him sing an English song.我听见他唱一首英文歌。

类似hear 这种用法的还有see, watch, listen, feel等感官动词。6.any /some any和some 都可以同不可数名词和可数名词的复数形式连用，但some一般用在肯定句中；any用在疑问句和否定句中。试比较：

I want some money.我想要点钱。Have you any money? 你有钱吗？

I don’t have any money.我一点钱也没有。

some 有时也用于疑问句，表示说话人期待一个肯定回答或鼓励人家说“是”。例如： Would you like some more beer?请你再来点啤酒好吗？ Could I have some rice, please?请给我来点米饭好吗？ 7.hear /listen to listen to 和hear 都有“听”的意思，但含义有所不同。Listen to强调“听”的动作，hear 强调“听”的结果。例如：

Listen to me ,please!I’m going to tell you a story.请听我说！我给你们讲个故事。

Listen!Can you hear someone crying in the next room? 听！你能听见有人在隔壁房间里哭吗？

I listened, but heard nothing.我听了听，但什么也听不见。hear 后面如果接宾语从句，常常表示“听说”。例如：

I hear some foreign students will visit our school.我听说一些外国学生将要访问我们学校。

I hear there is going to be a film in our school this evening.我听说今晚我们学校要演一场电影。

8.Let’s… /Let us…

Let’s… 和Let us… 都表示“让我们……”, 如果us 包括听话人在内，其含义相同，附带问句用shall we.如果us 不包括听话人在内，其含义不同，Let us…的附带问句要用will you。例如：

Let’s go shopping, shall we? 我们去购物好吗？

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

9.take/ bring/ carry /get 这四个动词都有“拿”和“带”的意思，但含义有所不同。take意为“带走”，“拿走”，bring意为“带来”，“拿来”, get表示“到别的地方把某人或某物带来或拿来”，carry不强调方向，带有负重的意思。试比较： My parents often take me there on holidays.我父母常常带我到那里去度假。I’m going to take you to Beijing.我准备带你去北京。Bring me a cup of tea, please.请给我端杯茶来。

I’ll bring the book to you tomorrow.明天我把那本书给你带来。The waiter carried the me to the table服务员把肉送到桌上。

The monkey carried the bag on her back.猴子把那个包背在背上。She went back to get her handbag.他折回去拿他的手提包。Let me get the doctor.让我去请医生吧。

10.far away /faraway

(1)far away是一个副词短语，意思是“很远”。例如：

Some are far away.Some are nearer.有些离得很远，有些离得近一些的。The village is far away from here.那个村子离这儿很远。

(2)faraway是一个形容词，意思是“遥远的”，可以在句中作定语。例如： He lives in faraway mountain village.他住在一个遥远的小山村。11.find / look for find和look for 都有“找”的意思，但含义不同。find 强调“找”的结果，而look for 强调“找”的过程。请看下列例句：

He is looking for his bike.他在找他的自行车。

I’m looking for my watch, but can’t find it.我在找我的手表，但是找不到。I hope you will soon find your lost ring.希望你尽快找到丢失的戒指。另外，find还有“发现”；“感到”等意思。例如：

I found a wallet in the desk.我在课桌里发现了一个钱包。I find this book very interesting.我觉得这本书很有意思。12.in front of /in the front of In front of 表示在某物的前面，不在某物的范围内。In the front of 表示在某物的前部，在某物的范围内。试比较：

My seat is in front of Mary’s.我的座位在玛丽座位的前面。

He is sitting in the front of the car with the driver.他和司机坐在小车的前部。【考点扫描】

1.be going to的用法；

2.形容词的比较级、最高级； 3.形容词和副词的比较 4.一般过去时

初二年级（中）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.give a concert 2.fall down 3.go on 4.at the end of All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

5.go back 6.in ahurry 7.write down 8.come out 9.all the year round 10.later on

11.at times 12.ring sb.up

13.Happy New Year!14.have a party 15.hold on 16.hear from 17.be ready 18.at the moment 19.take out

20.the same as 21.turn over 22.get-together 23.put on 24.take a seat 25.wait for 26.get lost 27.just then 28.first of all 29.go wrong 30.make a noise 31.get on 32.get off 33.stand in line 34.at the head of 35.laugh at 36.throw about 37.in fact 38.at midnight 39.enjoy oneself 40.have a headache 41.have a cough 42.fall asleep 43.again and again 44.look over 45.take exercise II.重要句型 1.be good for sth.2.I think …

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

3.I hope… 4.I love…

5.I don’t like… 6.I’m sure… 7.forget to do sth.8.take a message for sb.9.give sb.the message 10.help yourself to sth.11.be famous for sth.12.on one’s way to… 13.make one’s way to… 14.quarrel with sb.15.agree with sb.16.stop sb.from doing sth.III.交际用语

1.What’s the weather like today? 2.It’s cold, but quite suuny.3.How cold it is today!4.Yes, but it’ll be warmer later on.5.Shall we make a snowman? 6.Ok.Come on!7.Happy New Year!8.May I speak to Ann, please?？ 9.Hold on, please.10.Thanks a lot for inviting me to your party.11.Ok.But I’m afraid I may be a little late.12.Can I take a message for you? 13.That’s OK.It doesn’t matter.14.I’m very sorry, but I can’t come.15.I’m sorry to hear that.16.Happy birthday!17.Would you like...? Would you like to...? 18.Do you think...? Yes, I think so./ No, I don't think so.19.Do you agree? Yes, I agree./ No, don't really agree.I really can't agree.20.There are a few / a lot of.../ on it.21.So do we.22.I'm happy you like it.23.Which is the way to..., please? 24.Turn right/left at the...crossing.25.Go on until you reach...26.How can I get to...? Go down/up/along this road.27.What's the matter? 28.It'll take you half an hour to...All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

29.We'd better catch a bus.30.It may be in...Ah, so it is 31.You must be more careful!32.You mustn't cross the road now.33.If you want to cross a street, you must wait for the green light.34.Please stand in line.35.You must wait for your turn.36.If you don't go soon, you'll be late.37.I don't feel very well.38.My head hurts.39.You mustn't eat anything until you see the doctor.40.What's the trouble? 41.What's the matter with…?

42.She didn't feel like eating anything.43.Nothing serious.44.Have/get a pain in… 45.No problem.46.Take this medicine three times a day.IV.重要语法 1.一般过去时；

2.反意疑问句的用法； 3.一般将来时； 4.感叹句；

5.简单句的五种基本句型；

6.情态动词can, may和must, have to的用法； 7.时间状语从句和条件状语从句。【名师讲解】 1.above/ over/ on

这三个介词都表示“在……之上”，但含义不同。on指在某物的表面上，和某物接触；above指在某物的上方，不和某物接触，但也不一定在某物的正上方；over指在某物的正上方，不和某物接触。试比较： There is a book on the desk.课桌上有一本书。

I raise my right hand above my head.我把右手高举过头。There is a stone bridge over the river.河面上有座石桥。2.forget to do sth./forget doing sth.forget to do sth.意思是“忘记做某事”，实际上还没做；forget doing sth,意思是“忘记做过某事”，实际上已经做过了。试比较：

I forgot to tell him the news.我忘记告诉他这条消息了。

I forgot telling him the news.我已经把这条消息告诉他了，我却忘了。类似的词还有：remember, regret等。3.hope/wish hope和wish 在汉语中都有“希望”的意思，但其含义和用法有所不同。主要区别如下：(1)wish可以用来表示不可实现的愿望；hope只能用来表示可能实现的愿望。例如： I wish I were 20 years younger.我但愿自己能年轻二十岁。

I hope you’ll be better soon.我希望你能很快好起来。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

I wish the weather wasn’t so cold.但愿天气不这麽冷。I hope he will come, too.我希望他也能来。

(2)wish可以接sb.to do sth.的结构，而hope不可以。例如： Do you wish me to come back later? 你是否希望我再来？ 4.be sure to do sth./ be sure of/about sb.or sth.(1)be sure to do sth.可以用来表示说话人给对方提出要求，意思是“务必”，也可以用来表示说话人做出的推断，意思是“一定”，“肯定”。例如：

Be sure to lock the door when you leave.你离开时务必把门锁好。

It’s a good film.You are sure to enjoy it.这是一部好电影，你肯定会喜欢的。(2)be sure of/about sb.or sth.可用来表示“某人对某事有把握”。例如： I’m sure of his success.我相信他会成功。

I think it was three years ago, but I’m not sure about it.我想那是三年前的事情，但我没有把握。5.hear from/hear of

hear意思是“听到”，从哪里听到要用from来表示。例如：

I’ve heard from Xiao Wu that we’ll start out military training tomorrow.我听小吴说，我们明天开始军训。

Listen to the tape and write out what you hear from Han Mei.听录音，并写出你从韩梅那里听到的内容。

hear from还有一个意思是“收到某人的来信”（=receive a letter from sb.）。例如： I heard from my pen friend in the U.S.A.last month.上个月我受到了美国笔友的来信。

I heard from her last week.我上周接到了她的来信。

hear of和和hear from含义不同。hear of 意思是“听说”，“得知”（某事或某人的存在），常用在疑问句和否定句里。例如：

Who is he? I’ve never heard of him.他是谁？我从来没有听说过他。I never heard of such a thing!这样的事我从来没有听说过。6.It’s a pleasure./With pleasure.It’s a pleasure这句话常用作别人向你表示致谢时的答语，意思是“那是我乐意做的”。例如：---Thank you for helping me.谢谢你地帮助。---It’s a pleasure.那是我乐意做的。---Thanks a lot.Bye.非常感谢。再见。---It’s a pleasure.那是我乐意做的。再见。

类似的话还有 “Not at all.” “You are welcome.” “That’s all right.”

With pleasure也用作客气的答语，主要用在别人要你做某事，而你又非常愿意去做的场合。例如：---Will you please pass me the newspaper, please?

请你把报纸递给我好吗？---With pleasure.当然可以。7.seem/look(1)二者都可以作“看起来”讲，但seem暗示凭借一些迹象作出的有根据的判断，这种判断往往接近事实；look着重强调由视觉得出的印象。两者都可跟(to be)+形容词和as if从句。如：

He seems / looks(to be)very happy today.他今天看起来很高兴。It looks(seems)as if it it is going to rain.好像要下雨了。(2)但下列情况中只用seem不用look：

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

1)后跟不定式to do时。如：

He seems to know the answer.他似乎知道答案。2)在It seems that...结构中。如：

It seems that he is happier now than yesterday.他像比昨天高兴些了。

8.be ready to do/be ready for/ get ready to do/get ready for(1)be ready to do和be ready for…表示“已作好…的准备”，强调状态(2)get ready to do和get ready for…表示“为…做准备”，强调行为。如：

I'm ready to do anything you want me to do.我愿意/随时准备做一切做你要我做的事。I'm ready for any questions you may ask.我愿意/随时准备回答你可能问的问题。He's getting ready to leave for Tokyo.他正准备动身去东京。Let's get ready for the hard moment.我们为这一艰难时刻作好准备吧。

(3)be ready to do 通常可理解“乐于做某事”，即思想上总是有做某事的准备。be not ready to do表示 “不轻易做某事”。如：

He's usually not ready to listen to others.他通常不轻易听从别人。9.at table/at the table at table在吃饭，at the table在桌子旁边。例如：

The Greens are at table.格林一家人在吃饭。

Mr.Black is sitting at the table and reading a book.布莱克先生坐在桌旁读书。10.reach, arrive/get to

三者都有“到达”之意。reach是及物动词，后直接加名词，get和arrive是不及物动词，不能直接加名词，须借助于介词。get to后加名词地点，若跟副词地点时，to去掉；arrive at +小地方，arrive in+大地方。如：

Lucy got to the zoo before 8 o'clock.露西8点前到了动物园。

When did your parents arrive in Shanghai? 你父母何时到上海的？

It was late when I got home.我到家时天色已晚。11.sick/ill

二者都是形容词。当“生病的，患病“之意时，ill只作表语，不作定语；而sick既可作表语也可作定语。sick有“呕吐，恶心”的意思，只能作表语，而ill无此意。如：

Li Lei was ill last week.(只作表语)李磊上周生病了。

He's a sick man.（作定语）他是病人。不能说成：He's an ill man.My grandfather was sick for a month last year.（作表语）我祖父去年病了一个

月。

12.in time/on time

in time是“及时”的意思，on time是“准时，按时”。如： I didn't get to the bus stop in time.我没有及时赶上汽车。We'll finish our job on time.我们要按时完成任务。13.may be/maybe

It may be in your inside pocket.= Maybe it is in your inside pocket.也许在你里边的口袋里。第一句中may be是情态动词+be 动词构成的谓语部分，意思是“也许是”，“可能是”；第二句中的maybe是副词，意思是“可能”，常位于句首，不能位于句中，相当于另一副词perhaps。再如：

Maybe you put it in that bag.也许你放在了那只包里。（不能说You maybe put it in that bag.）

It may be a hat.那可能是顶帽子。（不能说It maybe a hat.或It maybe is a hat.）14.noise/ voice/ sound All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

noise 指嘈杂声，噪音大的吵杂声。voice是指说话的声音，嗓音，嗓子。sound是指耳朵能够听到的声音、闹声等。它是表示声音之意的最普通的字。有时还用作科学上的声音。例如：

Don't make so much noise!别那么大声喧哗！

I didn't recognize John's voice on the telephone.在电话里我听不出约翰的声

音。

He spoke in a low voice.他低声说话。

We heard a strange sound.我们听到了一种奇怪的声音。

Sound travels fast, but light travels faster.声音传得快，但是光传得更快。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.一般过去时；

2.反意疑问句的用法； 3.一般将来时； 4.感叹句；

5.简单句的五种基本句型；

6.情态动词can, may和must, have to的用法； 7.时间状语从句和条件状语从句。

初二英语（下）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.on time 2.out of 3.all by oneself 4.lots of 5.no longer 6.get back 7.sooner or later 8.run away 9.eat up 10.take care of 11.turn off 12.turn on 13.after a while 14.make faces 15.teach oneself 16.fall off 17.play the piano 18.knock at 19.to one's surprise 20.look up 21.enjoy oneself 22.help yourself 23.tell a story / stories All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

24.leave....behind …… 25.come along

26.hold a sports meeting 27.be neck and neck 28.as...as 29.not so / as...as 30.do one's best 31.take part in 32.a moment late 33.Bad luck!34.fall behind 35.high jump 36.long jump 37.relay race 38.well done!39.take off 40.as usual 41.a pair of 42.at once 43.hurry off 44.come to oneself 45.after a while 46.knock on 47.take care of 48.at the moment 49.set off 50.here and there 51.on watch 52.look out 53.take one’s place II.重要句型

1.We’d better not do sth.2.leave one.oneself 3.find one’s way to a place 4.stand on one’s head 5.make sb.Happy 6.catch up with sb.7.pass on sth.to somebody 8.spend time doing sth.9.go on doing sth.10.get on well with sb.11.be angry with sb.12.be fed up with sth.13.not…until…

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

14.make room for sb.III.交际用语

1.We’re all by ourselves.2.I fell a little afraid.3.Don’t be afraid.4.Help!5.Can’t you hear anything?

6.I can’t hear anything / anybody there.7.Maybe it’s a tiger.8.Let’s get it back before they eat the food.9.Did she learn all by herself? 10.Could she swim when she was …years old? 11.She didn’t hurt herself.12.He couldn’t buy himself many nice things.13.Did he enjoy himself? 14.Help yourselves.15.Bad luck!16.Come on!17.Well done!Congratulations(to…)!18.It must be very interesting.19.I don’t think you’ll like it.20.It seems to be an interesting book.21.I’m sure(that)… I’m not sure if… I’m not sure what to…22.I hope so.23.What was he/she drawing when…? 24.I’m sorry to trouble you.25.Would you please…?

26.What were you doing at ten o’clock yesterday morning? 27.You look tired today.28.You’d better go to bed early tonight, if you can.29.How kind!30.Let’s move the bag, or it may cause an accident.31.It’s really nice of you.32.Don’t mention it.33.Don’t crowd around him.IV.重要语法

1.不定代词/副词的运用；

2.反身代词的用法； 3.并列句；

4.形容词和副词的比较等级； 5.冠词的用法；

6.动词的过去进行时； 【名师讲解】 1.bring/take All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

Bring表示“带来、拿来”，指从别处朝说话人所在或将在的地方“带来、拿来”。而take则表示“拿去、带走”，它表示的方向与bring相反，指从说话人所在地“拿走、带走”。如： Bring me the book, please.把那本书给我拿来。

Take some food to the old man.给那位老人带去些食物。2.somebody/ anybody/nobody

一般说来，somebody用于定句，anybody用于否定句、疑问句和条件状语从句。例如：

Somebody came to see you when you were out.你出来时有人来见你。

Does anybody live on this island? 有人在这岛上住吗？

I didn't see anybody there.我在那儿谁也没看见。

Don't let anybody in.I'm too busy to see anybody.别让任何人进来。我太忙，谁也不想见。

There is nobody in the room.房间里没人。

Nobody told me that you were ill, so I didn't know about it.谁也没告诉我你病了。所以我不知道。

3.listen, listen to, hear

这三个词意思都是“听”，但是它们的用法不完全相同。它们的区别在于：

(1)listen 只用于不及物动词，后面接人或人物做宾语，着重于“倾听”，指的是有意识的动作，至于是否听到，并非强调的重点。如：

Listen!Someone is singing in the classroom.听！有人在教室唱歌。

(2)listen to 为listen的及物形式，后面一定要接人或物做宾语，这里的to是介词。如： Do you like listening to light music?你喜欢听轻音乐吗？

(3)hear 可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词，意思是“听到、听见”，指用耳朵听到了某个声音，表示无意识的动作，着重于听的能力和结果。如： We hear with our ears.我们用耳朵听。

She listens but hears nothing.她听了听，但是什么也没有听见。4.many/ much/ a few/ a little/ few/ little(1)many修饰可数名词，much修饰不可数名词；都表示许多。例如：

He has many books.他有许多书。

He drank much milk.他喝了许多牛奶。

(2)a few和a little都表示“有一点儿”，侧重于肯定，相当于“some”，但a few修

饰可数名词，a little修饰不可数名词，例如：

He has a few friends in London.他在伦敦有一些朋友。

Would you like some coffee? Yes, just a little.喝点咖啡好吗？好的，只要一点。

(3)few和little表示“几乎没有”，侧重否定。few后接可数名词，little后接不可数名词。例如： He is a strange man.He has few words.他是个怪人，他几乎不说什么话。Hurry up, there is little time left.赶快，没什么时间了。

5.either/ neither/ both

either可作形容词，一般指“两者中的任何一个”。有时也可表示“两个都……”的意思，后跟名词的单数形式；neither: 指两者中没有一个，全否定；both: 指两者都，肯定。句中可作主语、宾语和定语，both后面应跟名词的复数形式。如：

Neither of the films is good.两部电影都不好。（没有一部是好的）

Either of the films is good.两部电影都不错。（谓语动词用单数）

Both the teachers often answer the questions.这两个老师都常常解答问题。6.take part in/join

take part in参加某种活动;join参加，加入某一政党或组织。例如： Can you take part in my party.你能来参加我的派对吗？

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

We often take part in many school activities.我们经常参加学校里的一些活动。He joined the party in 1963.他1963年入的党。

My little brother joined the army last year.我小弟去年参的军。7.quite/ rather/ very(1)quite 表示程度“很，十分，完全地”，“相当”。如： She is quite right.她对极了。

That's not quite what I want.那并不完全是我所要的。

(2)rather 表示程度上的“相当”，比预想地程度要大，通常用在不喜欢的情况下。如：It's rather cold today.今天的天气相当冷。

(3)very表示程度“很，甚，极其，非常”，用于修饰形容词或副词，既可用在喜欢的情况下，也可用于不喜欢的情况下。应注意“a very +形容词+可数名词的单数”结构中，“a”应置于“very”之前，该结构相当“quite a/an +形容词+名词”的结构。如：

Two months is quite a long time./ a very long time.两个月是一段很长的时间。It's a very nice day / quite a nice day.今天天气很好。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.不定代词/副词的运用；

2.反身代词的用法； 3.并列句；

4.形容词和副词的比较等级； 5.冠词的用法；

6.动词的过去进行时。

初三年级（上）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

1.at the moment

2.used to 3.for a while

4.walk away with sth.5.leave for some place 6.sooner or later 7.pay for

8.come up with an idea 9.think of 10.have a try

11.all over the world 12.be famous for 13.large numbers of 14.all the year round 15.no matter what 16.give up 17.for example 18.by the way All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

19.on business 20.so far 21.come true 22.set off 23.slow down 24.go on doing 25.wait for 26.be proud of 27.be afraid of 28.speak highly of 29.a year and a half 30.half a year 31.pick up 32.as soon as 33.keep… clean 34.take care of 35.cut down

36.make a contribution to 37.base on 38.make sure 39.take away 40.begin with 41.right now 42.as soon as possible 43.leave a message 44.all kinds of things 45.walk around 46.fall asleep 47.wake up 48.go on a trip

49.have a good time 50.take photos 51.come out 52.come on

53.have a family meeting 54.talk about 55.go for a holiday 56 go scuba diving 57.write down 58.by oneself 59.walk along

60.get a chance to do sth 61.have a wonderful time 62.book a room All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

63.have an accident 64.be interested in 65.use sth.to do sth.66.make a TV show 67.be amazed at 68.take part in 69.feed on 70.get out of II.重要句型

1.Why don’t you do sth.?

2.make sb.Happy 3.borrow sth.from sb.4.forget to do sth.5.pay fro sth.6.return sth.To sb.7.learn sth.from sb.8.be famous for sth.9.No matter what…

10.be with sb.11.go on doing sth.12.speak highly of sb.13.keep doing sth.14.allow sb.To do sth.15.encourage sb.to do sth.16.It is said that… III.交际用语

1.---Excuse me, have you got …?---Yes, I have.(Sorry, I haven’t.)2.---Why don’t you …?---Thanks, I will.3.---Thanks a lot.(Thank you very much.)---You are welcome.4.---Have you ever done…?---Yes, I have, once.(No, never.)5.---I’ve just done…---Really? 6.---What’s …like ?

7.---How long have you been…?---Since…

8.---Have you ever been to…?

---I’ve never been there.(None of us has./ Only …has.)9.---Would you like to have a try?---I don’t think I can…

10.---What have you done since…?

11.---How long have you been at this …?

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

---For…

12.---How long has she/ he worked there…?

---She’s / He’s worked there for… / all her / his life.13.---I’m sorry he isn’t here right now.14.---May I help you? 15.---That’s very kind of you.16.---Could we go scuba diving? 17.---Could you tell us how long we’re going to be away? 18.---Let’s try to find some information about it, OK? 19.---Could you please tell me how to search the Internet? 20.---Go straight along here.21.---Please go to Gate 12.22.---Please come this way.23.---Could you tell me what you think about Hainan Island? 24.---That sounds really cool!IV.重要语法 1.宾语从句

2.现在完成时

3.一般过去时与现在完成时的用法比较 【名师讲解】

1.Maybe/ may be

(1)maybe是副词，意思是“大概，也许”，常用作状语。

Maybe you put it in your bag.也许你把它放在包里了。

“Will he come tomorrow?”“Maybe not.” “他明天来吗？”“也许不”。

(2)may be相当于是情态动词may与be动词搭配一起作谓语，意思是“也许是…，可能是…”。

It may be 9:00 when they arrive.他们可能于九点到达。The man may be a lawyer.那人也许是律师。2.borrow/ lend/ keep/ use

(1)borrow表示的是从别人那里借来东西，即我们通常所说的“借进来”。We often borrow books from our school library.我们经常从学校图书馆借书。I borrowed this dictionary from my teacher.我从老师那儿借来了这本字典。

borrow是一个瞬间完成的动作，因此不能与时间段连用。You can borrow my recorder for three days.(错误)I have borrowed this book for only one week.(错误)

(2)lend表示的是把自己的东西借给别人，即我们通常所说的“借出去”。Thank you for lending me your bike.谢谢你把自行车借给我。He often lends money to his brother.他经常借钱给他弟弟。

lend与borrow一样，也是一个瞬间完成的 动作，不能与一段时间连用。

(3)keep的意思也是“借”，但一般是指借来后的保存或使用阶段，是一段持续的时间，因此可以与时 间段连用。

You can keep my recorder for three days.我的录音机你可以借用三天。I have kept this book for only one week.这本书我才刚借了一星期。(4)use也可以当“借用”讲，但它的本意是“用，使用”。May I use your ruler? 我能借你的尺子用一下吗？

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

He had to use this public telephone.他不得不使用这部公用电话。3.leave/ leave for

(1)leave意思是“离开，留下”。

We left Shanghai two years ago.我们两年前离开了上海。

He left his cell phone in the taxi last week.他上周把手机落在出租车里了。(2)leave for意思是“前往”，表示要去的目的地。

We will leave for Tibet next month.我们将于下月去西藏。The train is leaving for Moscow.这趟火车即将开往莫斯科。4.since/ for

(1)since用于完成时态，既能用作介词，也能用作连词，后常接时间点，意思是“自从”。

He has been a worker since he came into this city.自从他来到这个城市，他就是工人了。

I have never seen him since we last met in Shanghai.自从我们上次在上海见过之后，我再也没见过他。since作连词，还有“既然”的意思。

Since you are interested in it, just do it.既然你对它感兴趣，那就做吧。

You can have fun now since you’ve finished your work.既然你已经做完了功课，就开心玩会儿吧。

(2)for用于完成时，用作介词，后常接一段时间，意思是“经过…”。

I have learned English for five years.我已经学了五年英语了。

They have waited for you for 30 minutes.他们已经等了你三十分钟了。for也可以用作连词，但意思是“因为”。

They missed the flight for they were late.他们由于完到了而误了航班。He fell ill for many reasons.他由于多种原因病倒了。5.neither/ either/ both

(1)neither作代词是对两者都进行否定，意思为“两者都不”，作主语时谓语动词用单数.Neither of the boys is from England.这两个男孩都不是来自英国。I know neither of them.他们两个我都不认识。

neither用作形容词，也修饰单数名词，意思与作代词时相同；用作连词时，一般与nor搭配，表示 “既不…也不”。作主语时，谓语动词也遵循就近原则。

She neither ate nor drank yesterday.她昨天既不吃也不喝。

Neither he nor we play football on Sundays.他和我们星期天都不踢球。

(2)either作代词时，是指两者中的任意一方,(两者之)每一个，故作主语时谓语动词用单数.Either of the books is new.这两本书任何一本都是新的.She doesn’t like either of the films.这两部电影她都不喜欢.either作形容词, 用来修饰单数名词,意思与作介词时相同.Either school is near my home.(这两所学校中的)任何一所学校都离我家很近.Either question is difficult.两个问题(中的任何一个)都难.either作连词时,一般与or搭配,表示两者选其一，意思是“不是…就是”。作主语时，谓语动词遵循就近原则。

Either he or I am right.不是他就是我是对的。

Either my sister or my parents are coming to see me.不是我姐姐就是我父母要来

看我。

(3)both作代词时，指的是所涉及到的“两者都”, 故作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

I like both of the stories.这两个故事我都喜欢。

Both of my parents are teachers.我父母两人都是老师。both作形容词时，用来修饰两者,意思与作代词时相同.Both his arms are hurt.他的两只胳膊都受伤了。

Both these students are good at English.这两个学生都擅长英语。

both用作连词时，多与and搭配，表示“既…又, 不仅…而且”, 作主语时,谓语动词仍用复数形式。

Both piano and violin are my bobbies.钢琴和小提琴都是我的爱好。They study both history and physics.他们既学历史，又学物理。

6.find/look for/ find out

(1)find强调找的结果，意思是“找到”。此外还有“发现，发觉”的意思，后可接宾语从句。

Jim couldn’t find his hat.吉姆找不着帽子了。

Have you found your lost keys? 你找到丢失的钥匙了吗？

He found the lights were on along the street.他发现沿街的灯都亮了

(2)look for的意思为“寻找”，指的是找的动作而非结果。另外，还有“盼望，期待”的意思。

She is looking for her son.她正在找她的儿子。

We’ve been looking for the car since early this morning.我们从今天一大早就开始找这辆车了。I look for the coming holiday.我期待着即将来临的假期。

(3)find out含有经过观察、研究或探索而得知的意思，后常接较抽象的事物，意思是“找出，发现，查明（真相）”等。

I can find out who took my money away.我能查出谁拿了我的钱。

Could you find out when the plane arrives? 你能设法知道飞机何时到吗？

7.forget to do/ forget doing

(1)forget to do是指忘记去做某件事了，即该事还没有做。

Please don’t forget to call this afternoon.今天下午不要忘了给我打电话。I forgot to take some small change with me.我身上忘了带零钱了。

(2)forget doing是指忘记某件已经做过的事情，即该事已经做了，但被忘记了。

He forgot telling me his address.他忘了告诉过我地址了。

They forgot having been here before.他们忘了以前曾来过这儿。8.stop doing/ stop to do

(1)stop doing是指停止做某事，即doing这个动作不再继续。They stopped debating.他们停止了辩论。（不辩论了）

He had to stop driving as the traffic lights changed in to red.由于交通灯变成了红色，他不得不停车。

(2)stop to do是指停下来开始做另一件事，即停止原先的事，开始做do这个动作。

She stopped to have a rest.她停下来休息会儿。（开始休息）They stopped to talk.他们停下来开始交谈。9.except/ besides

(1)except是指不包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“撇开…不谈”,表示两部分的不同。

Everyone is excited except me.除我以外的每个人都很激动。（他们激动，而我却不激动）All the visitors are Japanese except him.除他以外的所有游客都是日本人。（其他人是日本人，可他不是）

(2)besides是包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“除之外…还、除之外…又”，表示两部分 的相似性。

Twenty-five students went to the cinema besides him.All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

除他以外，还有25个学生去看了电影。(他和另外25人都去了)We like biology besides English.除了英语外，我们还喜欢生物。（生物和英语都喜欢）

besides还可用作副词，意思是“此外；而且”，常用于句首或句尾。He is a great thinker, and besides, he is a politician.他是一名伟大的思想家，除此以外，他还是一位政治家。

They encouraged me, and they supported me with money, besides.他们不仅鼓励我，而且与我以金钱上的支持。

10.keep doing/ keep on doing

(1)keep doing指的是连续地、坚持不断地做某事，中间不间断。

It kept blowing for a whole day.刮了一整天风了。The temperature keeps dropping.温度持续下降。

(2)keep on doing是指反复坚持做某事，但动作之间略有间隔。

They have kept on writing to each other for many years.他们已经互相通信多年了。After drinking some water, he kept on talking.喝了一些水后，他坚持讲话。11.seem/ look

(1)seem一般着重于以客观迹象为依据，意思是“似乎、好象、看起来…”。

The baby seems to be happy.婴儿看上去似乎很高兴。He seemed to be sorry for that.他似乎为那件事感到抱歉。

seem能与to do结构连用，而look不能。

It seems to rain.似乎要下雨了。

They seemed to have finished their work.他们似乎已经完成了工作。在it作形式主语的句型中只能用seem。

It seems that he is quite busy now.他现在看起来很忙。

It seems to us that there is nothing serious.在我看来没什么大不了的。

(2)look用作“看起来；好像”时，常从物体的外观或样貌上来判断，是以视觉所接受的印象为依据的。

The room looks clean.这间房看起来很干净。

The girl looks like her mother.那女孩看起来向她的妈妈。12.such/ so

(1)such常用作形容词，用来修饰名词。

Don’t be such a fool.别这么傻。

He is such a clever boy.他是如此聪明的一个男孩。

(2)so是副词，用来修饰形容词或副词。

He is so kind!他真好心！

Why did you come so late? 你为何回来得如此晚？

当名词前有many, much, few, little等表示多、少时，应该用so。

He has so many friends.他有如此多的朋友。

Only so little time is left!才剩这么一点儿时间！13.either/ too/ also

(1)either用作“也”时是副词，常用于否定句句尾。

She is not a Japanese, I’m not, either.她不是日本人，我也不是。My sister doesn’t like this song, either.我妹妹也不喜欢这首歌。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

(2)too常用于肯定句或疑问句尾，表示“也”。He likes China, too.他也喜欢中国。

Are you in Grade 3, too? 你也在三年级吗？

(3)also也常用于肯定句或疑问句，但一般位于句中。We are also students.我们也是学生。

He also went there on foot.他也是走着去的。

Did you also want to have a look? 你也想看看吗？

14.if/ whether

在下列情况下只能用whether而非if：

(1)与or not连用时，只能用whether.We want to know whether you are ill or not.我们想知道你是否生病了。Please tell me whether or not you have finished your work.请告诉我们你是否完成了工作。

(2)后接动词不定式时，只能用whether.Adam didn’t know whether to go or stay.亚当不知道是走还是留。

He hasn’t decided whether to have dinner with me.他还没决定是否和我共进晚

餐。

(3)所引导的宾语从句放在主句之前时，只能用whether.Whether it will rain or snow, we don’t mind.我们不在乎将要刮风还是下雨。Whether I won or lost, she didn’t want to know.我是赢是输她不想知道。(4)引导主语从句或表语从句时，一般用whether.The most important was whether they had gone.最重要的是他们是不是已经

走了。

Whether he will go with me is a secret.他是否会和我一起去还是个秘密。if能引导条件状语从句，表示“如果，假如”，而whether没有此用法。

We’ll have a football match if it doesn’t rain tomorrow.如果明天不下雨，我们

要进行足球赛。

I’ll tell him if I sees him.我看见他就告诉他。

If you’re in danger, please call 110.如果你遇到危险，请拨打110。15.cost/ spend/ pay/ take

(1)cost一般用某物来做主语，表示“（某物）值…、花费…”，既能指花费时

间也能指金钱。

The new bike costs me 300 yuan.这辆新自行车花了我三百元。

It will cost you a whole to read through this book.通读这本书将会花费你整整 一周时间。

cost 还可以用作名词，表示“成本、费用、价格、代价”等。What’s the cost of this TV set? 这台电视机的成本是多少钱？

They succeeded at the cost of hard work.他们辛苦地工作换来的成功。

(2)spend一般用某人来作主语，表示“（某人）花费…，付出…”，也能指时间或金钱，指时间时常与 in搭配，指金钱时常与on或for搭配。

We spent two days in repairing this machine.我们花了两天时间修理这台机器。

Mr.Lee spends $20 on books every month.李先生每月花二十美元在书上。

(3)pay用作动词时，一般也以某人作主语，但一般指花钱、付款等，很少用来指花费时间。常与for搭配使用。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

They paid 70 yuan for the tickets.他们花了七十元买票。

He was too poor to pay for his schooling.他穷得交不起学费。pay还可以用作名词，意思为“薪水、工资”等。

It’s hard for me to live with such low pay.我很难靠这么低的薪水生活下去。(4)take也指“花费(时间、金钱)”，但通常用某事、某物做主语，或用形式主语it.How long will the meeting take? 会议要开多久？

It took me several hours to get there.我花了几个小时才到那儿。16.bad/ badly

这两个词的意思含有“坏、糟、严重”等意思，且它们有共同的比较级worse和最高级worst。

(1)bad是一个形容词，意思是“坏的，糟糕的，差的，严重的”。

I don’t think he is a bad person.我并不认为他是一个坏人。I had a bad headache.我的头疼得很厉害。

(2)badly是一个副词，意思是“不好地，差”，也可以表示程度，意为“严重地，非常，极度”。

We need help badly.我们急需帮助。

His arm was badly hurt.他的胳膊严重受伤了。17.interested/ interesting

(1)interested是指“对…产生兴趣的，对…感兴趣的”，一般用人做主语，后常用介词in.He was interested in biology before.他以前对生物感兴趣。

I’m not interested in art.我对艺术不感兴趣。

(2)interesting的意思是“有趣的”，指能够给人带来兴趣的某人或某事物。

He is an interesting old man.他是个有趣的老头。

The interesting story attracted me.这个有趣的故事吸引了我。18.dead/ die/ death/ dying

(1)dead是形容词，意思为“死了的、无生命的”，表示状态，可以与一段时间连用。

The tree has been dead for ten years.这棵树死了有十年了。The rabbits are all dead.这些兔子都是死的。

(2)die是动词，意思为“死、死亡”，是一个瞬间动词，不能与一段时间连用。

My grandpa died two years ago.我爷爷两年前去世了。The old man died of cancer.老人死于癌症。(3)death是名词，意思为“死亡、去世”等。

The memorial hall was built one year after his death.他死后一年，纪念馆建成了。

His death is a great loss to us.他的死是我们的巨大损失。

(4)dying 是die的现在分词，用作形容词，意思是“垂死的、即将死去的”。

The doctors have saved the dying man.医生们救活了那个垂死的人。The poor dog had no food, it was dying.可怜的狗没有食物,快要饿死了。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.宾语从句的时态和语序；

2.一般过去时和过去完成时的用法区别。

初三年级（中）

【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

1.give up 2.try out 3.most of

4.not…any more 5.at the age of 6.at that time

7.send message by telegraph 8.graduate from 9.turn down 10.put up 11.at the top of 12.get together

13.from house to house 14.at the end of 15.on top of 16.as well 17.climb down 18.in a single night 19.even though 20.live on

21.once upon a time 22.according to 23.keep warm

24.on the other hand 25.on show 26.on display 27.in the future 28.look up 29.Tree Planting Day 30.just right

31.as often as possible 32.wash away 33.in this way

34.in a few years' time 35.point to 36.thanks to 37.more or less 38.so far 39.shut down 40.send up 41.put off II.重要句型

1.set one's mind to do sth.2.put … together

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

3.stop…from… 4.keep…from… 5.be filled with sth.6.give birth to 7.be covered with 8.be made of 9.fill…with… 10.match…with 11.be used for 12.have nothing to do with 13.come up with 14.no matter how… 15.keep sb./sth.warm III.交际用语

1.---I'm trying to … 2.---I'll …

3.---Which of these would you like most to …? 4.---What do you want to … ? 5.---I want to… 6.---I hope to … 7.---I plan to… 8.---I'm going to…

9.---I'm so happy that … 10.---I'm glad ….11.---me too.12.---What's this called in English? 13.---What's it made of? 14.---It's made of …

15.---What's it used for? 16.---It's used for …

17.---English is widely used for business/ …

18.---It is one of the world's most important languages as it is so widely used.19.---Where is / are … grown / produced / made ? 20.---The(ground)must be just right… 21.---It's best to …

22.---The hole should not be too deep.23.---The Great Green Wall is 7000 kilometres long, and between 400 and 1700 kilometres wide.24.---The more, the better.25.---More or less!

26.---The(ground)must be just right… 27.---The hole should not be too deep.28.掌握以下常见标志：

ENTRANCE EXIT PUSH PULL NO SMOKING NO PARKING All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

FRAGILE THIS SIDE UP NO PHOTOS DANGER BUSINESS HOURS PLAY STOP PAUSE ON OFF IV.重要语法

1.动词被动语态的结构和用法； 2.动词不定式的功能和用法。【名师讲解】 1.be able to/ can

(1)都能表示“能够，具备干某件事的能力”这个含义，此时可以互换。

Mr.Green is able to finish the work on time.= Mr.Green can finish the work on time.格林先生能够按时完成这项工作。

(2)be able to可以用于各种时态，而can 为情态动词，多用于现在时，其过去式为could。

We are sure he will be able to be an artist when he grows up.我们相信他长大后能够成为一名画家。

Miss Lin has been able to pay the car by herself.林小姐已经能够自己负担那辆车了。

(4)Can除了表示“能够，有能力做某事”以外，还有如下用法，而be able to 则没有。表示请求，但语

气没有could委婉

Can I have a look at this picture? 我能看看这张图片吗？

Can we leave school after 6:00 p.m.?我们可以在下午6点之后再离开学校吗？ 表示可能性。

That man can’t be our new teacher.那人不可能是我们的新老师。The exam can’t be too difficult.考试不会太难。2.bring/ take/carry/fetch

(1)bring一般是指拿来，即从别处往说话人这里拿，翻译成“带来”。

He brought us some good news.他给我们带来了一些好消息。Please don’t forget to bring your homework tomorrow.明天请别忘了把家庭作业带来。

(2)take一般是指从说话人这里往别处拿，翻译成“带走”。

Please take the umbrella with you.It’s going to rain.要下雨了，请把伞带上。

She took the dictionary away.她把字典拿走了。

(3)carry不强调方向，表示“携带、背着、运送、搬扛”等意思。

They carried the boxes into the factory.他们把箱子搬进了工厂。

A taxi carried them to the station.出租车送他们到了车站

(4)fetch表示的是“去取来、去拿来、去叫来”等意思，包含去和来两趟。

The waiter fetched them some apples.侍者为他们取来了一些苹果。Mother fetched the doctor for her ill son.妈妈为生病的儿子请来了医生。3.whole/ all

(1)whole强调一个完整如一，互不分割的整体。

The whole country is suffering the war.整个国家正遭遇战争。I just want to know the whole story.我仅仅只想知道完整的故事。

whole在句中的位置是放在所有格，冠词和指示代词的之后。

They will spend their whole holiday in Canada.All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

他们将到加拿大渡过整个假期。（所有格后）

She has finished writing the whole book.她已经写完了整本书。（冠词后

whole用来修饰可数名词（名词用单数）。

He ate the whole cake.他把整个蛋糕都吃了。（强调整整一个蛋糕）(2)all强调由一个个部分组成的“全部”。

Miss Green knew all the students in the class.格林小姐认识这个班上的所有人。（一个一个全认识）

all在句中的位置是放在所有格，定冠词和指示代词的之前。

Jim finished all his homework in twenty minutes.吉姆在20分钟之内完成了所有的作业。（所有格前）

Of all the boys here, he sings best.在这里所有的男孩之中，他唱的最好。（定冠词前）

The boy can answer all these questions.那个男孩能够回答所有的这些问题。（指示代词前）all既能修饰可数名词（名词须用复数），又能修饰不可数名词。

All these five books are mine.这五本书都是我的。（修饰可数名词）

She was worried about her son all the time.她总在为她的儿子担心。（修饰不可数名词）4.fill/ full

(1)fill常作动词，与with连用，意思是“注满、装满”，也能表示“填空；补缺”的意思。

He filled the box with chalk.他把粉笔装满了盒子。The bucket is filled with water.水桶里装满了水。

(2)full是形容词，翻译成“满的，装满的”，常与of连用。此外还能表示“完全的”和“吃饱的，过饱的”。All the rooms are full of people.所有的房间都满人了。

The bus was full.He had to wait for the next one.这辆车人满了，他只有等下一辆。5.be made of/ be made from/ be made in/ be made into

(1)be made of表示“由…制成”, 一般指能够看出原材料，或发生的是物理变化。

This table cloth is made of paper.这张桌布是由纸做的。

This salad is made of apples and strawberries.这种沙拉是由苹果和草莓做的。

(2)be made from也表示“由…制成”，但一般指看不出原材料，或发生的是化学变化。Bread is made from corn.面包是小麦做的。

The lifeboat is made from some special material.这个救生艇是由某种特殊材料制成的。(3)be made in指的是产地，意思为“于…制造”。The caps are made in Russia.这些帽子产于俄罗斯。

My mother likes to buy things which are made in China.我妈妈喜欢买中国产的东西。

(4)be made into的意思为“被制成为…”。

This piece of wood will be made into a small bench.这块木头将要被制成一个小凳。The paper has been made into clothes for the doll.纸被做成了洋娃娃的衣服。6.none/ no one/ neither(1)none既能指人，又能指物，意思是“没有一个，无一”，常用作代词，与of连用。None of us has heard of him before.我们没有一个人以前听说过他。I like none of the coats.那些外套我一件都不喜欢。none用作主语时，谓语动词用单复数皆可。

None of the answers is true.没有一个答案是正确的。None of the rooms are mine.没有一间房子是我的。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

(2)no one只能用来指人，且不能与of连用。No one is absent.没有人缺席。

I knew no one there.那里我一个人也不认识。no one用作主语时，谓语动词只能用单数。No one agrees with you.没有人同意你的说法。

(3)neither作代词是对两者都进行否定，意思为“两者都不”，作主语时谓语动词用单数。Neither of the boys is from England.这两个男孩都不是来自英国。I know neither of them.他们两个我都不认识。7.found/ find

(1)find的意思是“找到、发现”，其过去式和过去分词都是found.I can't find my glasses.我找不着我的眼镜了。

He found it boring to sit here alone.他发现独自坐在这里很没劲。

(2)found是另外一个词，与find并没有关系，意思是“成立、建设”，常用作及物动词。

The People's Republic of China was founded in 1949.中华人民共和国成立于1949年。

The school was founded by the local residents.这所学校是由当地居民修建的。8.hear / hear of/ hear from

(1)hear的意思是“听见；听说，得知”，后面能接名词、代词或宾语从句。

We heard the news just a moment ago.我刚听说这个消息。

Can you hear me? 能听见我说话吗？

(2)hear of的意思是“听说”，一般指非直接的听见，而是听别人说的。后不能接宾语从句。

I have never heard of her.我从未听说过她。

They heard of the film long time ago.他们很久以前就听说过这部电影。(3)hear from的意思是“收到来信”，与“听”无关。I often hear from him.我经常收到他的来信。

He hasn't heard from his mother for a long time.他很久没有收到妈妈的信了 9.send/ send for

(1)send意思是“送往，派遣”，还有“发信，寄信”的意思。

The company sent him to study abroad.公司派他到国外学习去了。

Mr.Brown sent her children away.布郎夫人送走了孩子们。

(2)send for意思是“召唤；派人去取；派人去拿”，而非本人亲自去。

They have sent for a repairman.他们已经派人去请了一名修理工。

She sent for some flowers.她派了人去买花。10.get to/ arrive/ reach

(1)arrive后不能直接接地点，是一个不及物动词。若表示到达一个相对大的地点，用arrive in;若表示相对小的地点，用arrive at.The delegation will arrive in China at 5:00 p.m.代表团将于下午5:00到达北京。

It was dark when they arrived at the railway station.当他们到达火车站的时候，天已经黑了。

When did she arrive here last time? 她上次是什么时候到这儿的？（副词前省略介词）(2)reach能直接接所到达的地点，是一个及物动词。They reached London on Friday.他们星期五到达了伦敦。

The news only reached me yesterday.我于昨天才接到这个消息。reach还有“伸手去取，伸手触及，联络”等意思。

Can you reach that apple on the tree? 你能够到树上的哪个苹果吗？ He can always be reached on the phone.可随时打电话跟他联系。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

(3)get在表示“到达”时是不及物动词，应与to搭配使用。We often get to school on foot.我们经常步行到学校。

They got to the top of the hill at noon.他们于中午到达了山顶。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.动词被动语态的结构和用法； 2.动词不定式的功能和用法。

初三年级（下）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

1.beg one's pardon 2.multiply …by… 3.slow down 4.wear out 5.try on

6.make a decision, 7.a place of interest 8.make a mistake 9.drop off

10.think about 11.make up one's mind, 12.at all, 13.at least 14.by the time 15.carry on 16.never mind 17.from now on 18.come down 19.hands up 20.before long，21.no one，22.not…any longer II.重要句型

1.be busy doing sth.2.prefer to do sth.3.regard...as...4.be pleased with sth./sb.5.be angry with sb.III.交际用语

1.---How much does… cost …?

2.---It can cost as little as … yuan and as much as … yuan.3.---It costs ….All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

4.---It's worth ….5.---I don't agree with ….6.---I wasn't sure whether….7.---I wonder if ….8.---What size …?

9.---Have you got any other colour / size / kind? 10.---Have you got anything cheaper? 11.---How much are they? 12.---How much does it cost? 13.---How much is it?

14.---That's a bit expensive.15.---Even though they're a little expensive, I'll take them.16.---I'll think about ….17.---I don't think I'll take ….18.---I like ….19.---I don't really like ….20.---Can I help you, girl?

21.---Would you like me to look in the back? 22.---We can find ….23.---Do you like being …?

24.---Can I ask you some questions? 25.---Sure.26.---It was great.27.---Wow!28.---Yeah!29.---Oh dear!30.---Hands up!

31.---I’ll shoot anyone who moves.32.---There’s no need to thank me.33.---Can you remember anything else about him? 34.---Come down, Polly!35.---There is a little traffic accident． 36.---There's a big traffic jam.37.---Well, I'm sure he'll be here before long.38.---I'm beginning to get angry with him!39.---Yes, we can't wait any longer.Let's go without him.40.---That's terrible!

41.---That's a really bad excuse!IV.重要语法 1.过去将来时

2.过去完成时 3.动词不定式 4.定语从句 【名师讲解】

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

1.think/ think/about/ think of(1)think 单独使用时表示“思考”，接that 宾语从句时意为“认为”，“觉得”。

I am thinking how to work out the problem.I think she is a good student.当宾语从句含有否定概念时，通常形式上否定think，但意义上却是否定宾语从句。I don't think he can come.I don't think it will be windy.(2)think about 可接一个名词，动词-ing 形式或由疑问词引导的不定式或宾语从句，意思是“考虑……”。

I have thought about it for a long time.Please think about how to tell her the bad news.(3)think of 表示“认为”，一般用于疑问句中，与what 连用。

What do you think of the TV play? = How do you like the TV play? 2.big/ large/ great 上述形容词都表示“大”，但侧重点及程度不同。

(1)big指具体事物的大小，强调比正常形体的标准大，既可用在普通场合，也可用在正式场合。它可用来指人的身材高大或“长大了”，还可表示“伟大”，“重要”之意。如：

Can you lift up this big stone? On the last day I made a big decision.(2)large特别强调远远超过标准的大，指体积、面积、容积、数量之大。如： A whale is a large animal.A large crowd collected at the gate of the theatre.(3)great除了表示数量体积之大外，又指抽象的程度，意味着伟大性，重要性，优越性；常用于抽象 或无形的东西；用于有形的东西时，常带有“伟大”，“大得令人吃惊”等意思，含有一定的感情色彩。如： China is a great country with a long history.He was one of the greatest scientists.3.cost/ take/ spend/ pay

(1)cost表示“花钱”，花费，付出（只能用于钱、精力、生命等；主语必须是物。）

The book cost me five yuan.(2)take的主语是动词不定式, 通常用it做形式主语。It took me five yuan to buy the book..(3)spend，在主动语句中主语是人

I spent five yuan on(for)the book.或I spent five yuan(in)buying the book.(4)pay的主语是人。

I paid five yuan for the book.4.expensive/ high/ cheap/ low

这四个词在谈论到价格的高低时，要注意使用。expensive与high涉及到价格“高”，而cheap 与low涉及到价格“低”。

(1)expensive昂贵的，花钱多的。这个单词若谈到“价格高，货贵”时，其主语不能是价格，必须是货物、物品本身。如：

This watch is expensive.这只表很贵。

These glass-products are not expensive.这些玻璃制品不是很值钱。

注意：cheap表示“价廉”，“便宜的”，其主语也不能是价格，必须是物品本身。如： The cheap table was bought from him.这张便宜的桌子是他卖给我们的。This cloth doll is very cheap.这只布娃娃很便宜。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

(2)high在表示价格时，含义是“高”，low在表示价格时，含义是“低”，这两个词不能用于物品本身，只 能用在价格上。如：

The price of this watch is very high.这只表的价格太高了。

The price of this book is not low for me.这本书的价格对我来说是不低。下面我们试看几个句子的正误对照： The price of this computer is expensive.(宜改为：This computer is expensive.或The price of this computer is high.)The price of this pen is not cheap for him to buy.(宜改为：This pen is not cheap for him to buy.或 The price of this pen is not low for him.)5.alone/ lonely

lonely 与alone的意思比较接近，但在使用时有所区别：

(1)lonely用作形容词，意思是“孤单的；寂寞的”。可指心灵上的寂寞，也可指偏僻的地点。在句中既可作表语，也可作定语。

(2)alone 可作形容词和副词，意思是“单独；独自”，不指心理上寂寞的感觉。She was taken to a lonely island, lived alone, but she never felt lonely.她被带到一个荒岛上，自己居住，但她从不感到寂寞。6.before long/ long before

(1)before long 作“不久以后”讲，切不要按字面译为“长时间以前”或“好久以前”。如： We hope to finish our experiment before long.我们希望不久（以后）就把实验做完。

(2)long before 作“很久以前”讲。原意为“……以前很久”，故也可译为“老早”。long before 跟before long 不同，前者在其后面可以接名词或一个从句；当上下文明确时，名词或从句还可以省略。Before long 则没有上述搭配用法。

They began the test yesterday, but we had made experiment long before.我们昨天开始做实验，但我们在那以前很久就已经做准备了。7.as/ when/ while(1)as 是连词，意思是“当……的时候，一面……一面”，（强调同时，一般连续时间不长），如： As we were talking about Titanic, our teacher came in.正当我们谈论“泰坦尼克号”这部电影时，教师进来了。The students sing as they go along.学生们边走边唱。

(2)When和as一样都是连词，注意它们的不同。如when“当……的时候”（一般表示动作紧接着发生）； “那时”（等立连词，前有逗号分开）

I stayed till sunset, when it began to rain.我一直呆到太阳下山，那时天开始下雨了。(3)while是“当……时候；和……同时”（强调同时发生，一般连续时间较长）While I was watching TV, he was reading.当我在看电视的时候，他正在看书。While there is life, there is hope.有生命就有希望。

8.beat/win/ hit

(1)beat 是动词，意思是“连续地打;打败;敲打”。beat后可接人或队名。意思是“击败对手。”如：

I can beat you at swimming.(2)win意思是“赢得某个项目”，后面常接“match, game”。如： He won a game.他胜一局。

We won a match.我们比赛得胜。

(3)hit意思是“击中”（有时可表示“打一下”）。如：

The mother hit her child out of anger.妈妈生气，打了她孩子一下。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

9.keep doing/keep on doing(1)keep doing侧重表示“持续不停地做某事”或“持续某种状态”。如：

The girl kept crying all the time.那个女孩一直在哭。

The baby kept sleeping about four hours.这个婴儿连续睡了大约四个小时。

(2)keep on doing 表示“总不断做某事”，不表示静止状态。不能与sitting, sleeping, lying, standing这类 词连用。如：

It kept on raining for seven days.Don't keep on asking such silly questions.10.get/ turn/ become

这三个词都可作系动词用，表示状态的变化，后跟表语，但三个词的用法稍有不同。get强调情感、气候和环境的变化；turn强调色彩的变化；而become则强调职务、职称等的变化。如：

The days are getting shorter and shorter in winter．冬天的白天越来越短。

She couldn't answer the question and her face turned red．她回答不出问题，脸红了。When did you become a teacher?-Ten years ago.你什么时候当的老师？十年前。11.steal / rob 从意思上讲steal表示偷窃的意思。而rob表示抢劫的意思；从搭配上来讲，steal sth from sb/sth;而rob则用rob sb/sth of sth;例如：

He stole money from the rich to give it to the poor.They robbed the bank of one million dollars.12.see/look/watch/notice 在英语中，see，look，watch，notice都有“看”的意思，要注意他们的区别。

see意为“看到”，表示视觉器官有意识或无意识地看到物体，强调“看到”的结果。look意为“看”，表示有意识地观看，强调“看”的动作。watch意为“观看，注视”，指以较大的注意力观看。

notice意为“看到，注意到”，指有意识的注意，含有从不注意到注意的变化的意义。例如： What can you see in the picture？在图画中你能看到什么？ Look!How happily they are playing！看！他们玩得多高兴啊！He’s watched TV for over two hours．他看了两个多小时的电视。He noticed a purse lying on the road．他注意到地上有个钱包。13.Shoot/ shoot at shoot是及物动词，意思是“射中，射死”，宾语多为人或动物等。而shoot at是一个动词词组，意为“向……射击”，至于射中或射死与否不得而知。如：

The man shot five birds in the forest．那个人在森林里射死（中）了五只鸟。The hunter shot at the bear．猎人朝熊射击了。

They shot at the she－wolf，but didn't shoot her．他们向那只母狼射击，但是没有射中。14.escape/ run away(1)escape作“逃跑”、“逃脱”或“逃避”讲时，往往会有成功之意。如： The old man escaped death．那个老人死里逃生。The thief escaped from prison．那个小偷越狱了。

(2)run away作“逃跑”、“跑走”讲时，往往强调动作。如： Don't let him run away． 别让他跑了。口语中escape和run away可以互用。15.so that..../ so...that....All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

陕西省丹凤县龙驹中学

张 增

2018年5月24日

(1)so that....为了，以便。引导一个目的状语从句，从句中往往有情态动词。也可引导一个结果状语从句。如：

I left at 5:00 so that I could catch the early bus.Speak loudly, so that they can hear what you say.He didn't study English so that he lost a chance to work in a foreign company.(2)so...that....既可引导一个结果状语从句，也可引导一个目的状语从句。如：The classroom was so noisy that I could hardly study.I got up so early in the morning that I could catch the train.【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.过去将来时；

2.过去完成时； 3.动词不定式； 4.定语从句。

All things are difficult before they are easy~

All things are difficult before they are easy~

第四篇：人教版 初一至初三英语目录知识点总结doc

人教版初一至初三英语目录知识点总结及练习

初一年级（上）

【目录】

预备篇

Unit 1 My name's Gina.Unit 2 Is this your pencil? Unit 3 This is my sister.Unit 4 Where's my backpack? Unit 5 Do you have a soccer ball? Unit 6 Do you like bananas? Review of units 1-6 Unit 7 How much are these pants? Unit 8 When is your birthday? Unit 9 Do you want to go to a movie? Unit 10 Can you play the guitar? Unit 11 What time do you go to school? Unit 12 My favarite subject is science 【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.Sit down 2.on duty 3.in English 4.have a seat 5.at home 6.look like 7.look at 8.have a look 9.come on 10.at work 11.at school 12.put on 13.look after 14.get up 15.go shopping II.重要句型

1.help sb.do sth.2.What about…? 3.Let‟s do sth.4.It‟s time to do sth.5.It‟s time for …

6.What‟s…? It is…/ It‟s… 7.Where is…? It‟s….8.How old are you? I‟m….9.What class are you in? I‟m in….10.Welcome to….11.What‟s …plus…? It‟s….12.I think…

13.Who‟s this? This is….14.What can you see？ I can see….15.There is(are)….16.What colour is it(are they)? It‟s(They‟re)… 17.Whose …is this? It‟s….18.What time is it? It‟s….III.交际用语

1.Good morning, Miss/Mr….2.Hello!Hi!3.Nice to meet you.Nice to meet you, too.4.How are you? I‟m fine, thank you/thanks.And you? 5.See you.See you later.6.Thank you!You‟re welcome.7.Goodbye!Bye!8.What‟s your name? My name is ….9.Here you are.This way, please.10.Who‟s on duty today? 11.Let‟s do.12.Let me see.IV.重要语法

1.动词be的用法；

2.人称代词和物主代词的用法； 3.名词的单复数和所有格的用法； 4.冠词的基本用法； 5.There be句型的用法。【讲解】

1.in/on

在表示空间位置时，in表示在某个空间的范围以内，on表示在某一个物体的表面之上。例如：

There is a bird in the tree.树上有只鸟。

There is a picture on the wall.墙上有张图。

2.this/that/these/those

(1)this常常用来指在时间、地点上更接近讲话人的人和事，these是this的复数形式。that常常用来指在时间、地点上离讲话人更远一点的人和事，those时that的复数形式。例如：

You look in this box and I‟ll look in that one over there.你看看这个盒子，我去看那边的那个盒子。

I want this car, not that car.我想要这辆小汽车，不是那一辆。

Take these books to his room, please.请把这些书拿到他房间去。

This is mine;that‟s yours.这个是我的，那个是你的。

These are apples;those are oranges.这些是苹果，那些是橘子。

(2)在打电话的用语中，this常常指的是我，that常常指的是对方。例如：

This is Mary speaking.Who‟s that? 我是玛丽。你是谁？

3.There be/ have There be “有”，其确切含意为“某处或某时存在某人或某物。”其结构是：There be + 某人或某物 + 表示地点或时间的状语。There be 后面的名词实际上是主语，be 动词的形式要和主语在数上保持一致，be动词后面的名词是单数或不可数名词时用is，名词是复数时用are。例如：

(1)There is a big bottle of coke on the table.桌上有一大瓶子可乐。(2)There is a doll in the box.那个盒子里有个娃娃。

(3)There are many apples on the tree.那树上有许多苹果。

总之，There be结构强调的是一种客观存在的“有”。have表示“拥有，占有，具有”，即：某人有某物(sb.have / has sth.)。主语一般是名词或代词，与主语是所属关系。例如：(4)I have two brothers and one sister.我有两个兄弟，一个姐姐。(5)That house has four rooms.那所房子有四个房间。4.look/ see/ watch

(1)look 表示“看、瞧”，着重指认真看，强调看的动作，表示有意识地注意看，但不一定看到，以提醒对方注意。，如：

Look!The children are playing computer games.瞧！孩子们在玩电脑游戏。Look!What‟s that over there? 看！那边那个是什么？

单独使用是不及物动词，如强调看某人/物，其后接介词at，才能带宾语，如： He‟s looking at me。他正在看着我。

(2)see强调“看”的结果，着重的是look这个动作的结果，意思是“看到”，see是及物动词，后面能直接跟宾语。如：

What can you see in the picture? 你能在图上看到什么？

Look at the blackboard.What did you see on it?看黑板！你看到了什么？

(3)watch“观看，注视”，侧重于场面，表示全神贯注地观看、观察或注视某事务的活动，强调过程，常用于“看电视、看足球、看演出”等。如：

Yesterday we watched a football match on TV.昨天我们从电视上看了一场足球比赛。4.put on/ / in

put on意为“穿上，戴上”。主要指“穿上”这一动作, 后面接表示服装、鞋帽的名词。in 是介词，表示“穿着”强调状态。在句中可以做定语、标语和状语。如： It‟s cold outside, put on your coat.外面冷，穿上你的外衣。He puts on his hat and goes out.他戴上帽子，走了出去。

The woman in a white blouse is John‟s mother.穿白色衬衣的那个妇女是John的妈妈。5.house/ home/family house ：“房子”，指居住的建筑物;Home: “家”，指一个人同家人共同经常居住的地方;Family: “家庭“，“家庭成员”。例如：

Please come to my house this afternoon.今天下午请到我家来。He is not at home.他不在家。

My family all get up early.我们全家都起得很早。6.fine, nice, good, well 四者都可用作形容词表示“好”之意，但前三者既可作表语又可作定语，而后者仅用作表语。主要区别在于：

(1)fine指物时表示的是质量上的“精细”，形容人时表示的是“身体健康”，也

可以用来指“天气晴朗”。例如：

Your parents are very fine.你父母身体很健康。That's a fine machine.那是一台很好的机器。It's a fine day for a walk today.今天是散步的好时候。

(2)nice主要侧重于人或物的外表，有“美好”，“漂亮”的意思，也可用于问候或赞扬别人。例如：

Lucy looks nice.露西看上去很漂亮。These coats are very nice.那些裙子很好看。Nice to meet you.见到你很高兴。It's very nice of you.你真好。

(3)good形容人时指“品德好”，形容物时指“质量好”，是表示人或物各方面都好的普通用语。例如：

Her son is a good student.她儿子是一个好学生。The red car is very good.那辆红色小汽车很好。

(4)well只可用来形容人的“身体好”，但不能作定语，它也能用作副词作状语，多放在所修饰的动词之后。例如：

I'm very well, thanks.我身体很好，谢谢。My friends sing well.我的朋友们歌唱得好。

【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.动词be的用法；

2.人称代词和物主代词的用法； 3.名词的单复数和所有格的用法； 4.冠词的基本用法； 5.There be句型的用法。

6.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 7.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空、完成句子。

初一年级（下）

【目录】

Unit 1 Where's your pen pal from? Unit 2 Where's the post office? Unit 3 Why do you like koalas? Unit 4 I want to be an actor.Unit 5 I'm watching TV.Unit 6 It's raining!Review of units 1-6 Unit 7 What does he look like? Unit 8 I'd like some noodles.Unit 9 How was your weekend? Unit 10 Where did you go on vacation? Unit 11 What do you think of game shows? Unit 12 Don't eat in class.【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

1.a bottle of 2.a little 3.a lot(of)4.all day 5.be from 6.be over 7.come back 8.come from 9.do one‟s homework 10.do the shopping 11.get down 12.get home 13.get to 14.get up 15.go shopping 16.have a drink of 17.have a look 18.have breakfast 19.have lunch 20.have supper 21.listen to 22.not…at all 23.put…away 24.take off 25.throw it like that 26.would like 27.in the middle of the day 28.in the morning / afternoon/ evening 29.on a farm 30.in a factory II.重要句型

1.Let sb.do sth.2.Could sb.do sth.? 3.would like sth.4.would like to do sth.5.What about something to eat? 6.How do you spell …? 7.May I borrow…? III.交际用语

1.—Thanks very much!—You're welcome.2.Put it/them away.3.What's wrong? 4.I think so.I don't think so.5.I want to take some books to the classroom.6.Give me a bottle of orange juice, please.Please give it / them back tomorrow.OK.9.What's your favourite sport? 10.Don't worry.11.I‟m(not)good at basketball.12.Do you want a go? 13.That's right./ That„s all right./ All right.14.Do you have a dictionary / any dictionaries? Yes, I do./ No, I don‟t.15.We / They have some CDs.We / They don‟t have any CDs.16.---What day is it today / tomorrow?---It‟s Monday.17.---May I borrow your colour pens, please?---Certainly.Here you are.18.---Where are you from?---From Beijing.19.What's your telephone number in New York? 20.---Do you like hot dogs?---Yes, I do.(A little./ A lot./ Very much.)---No, I don't.(I don't like them at all.)21.---What does your mother like?---She likes dumplings and vegetables very much.22.---When do you go to school every day?---I go to school at 7:00 every day.23.---What time does he go to bed in the evening?---He goes to bed at 10:00.IV.重要语法

1.人称代词的用法； 2.祈使句；

3.现在进行时的构成和用法； 4．动词have的用法；

5．一般现在时构成和用法；

6．可数名词和不可数名词的构成和用法 【名师讲解】

1.That's right./ That‘s all right./ All right.That’s right意为“对的”，表示赞同对方的意见、看法或行为，肯定对方的答案或判断。例如： “I think we must help the old man.”“我想我们应该帮助这位老人。” “That's right.”或 “You're right.”“说得对”。

That’s all right.意为“不用谢”、“没关系”，用来回答对方的致谢或道歉。例如： “Many thanks.” “That's all right.” “Sorry.It's broken.” “That's all right.” All right.意为“行了”、“可以”，表示同意对方的建议或要求。有时还可以表示“身体很好” “Please tell me about it.” “请把此事告诉我。” “All right.”“好吧。” Is your mother all right?你妈身体好吗

2.make/do 这两个词都可以解释为“做”，但含义却不同，不能混用。make指做东西或制东西，do指做一件具体的事。

Can you make a paper boat for me? 你能为我做个纸船吗？ He‟s doing his homework now.他正在做他的作业。

3.say/speak/talk/tell say：是最口语化的最普通的一个词，意为“说出”、“说道”，着重所说的话。如：

“I want to go there by bus” , he said.他说，“我要坐汽车到那里去。” Please say it in English.请用英语说。

speak : “说话”，着重开口发声，不着重所说的内容，一般用作不及物动词(即后面不能直接接宾语)。如：

Can you speak about him? 你能不能说说他的情况？ I don‟t like to speak like this.我不喜欢这样说话。

speak 作及物动词解时，只能和某种语言等连用，表达在对话中恰当使用词汇的能力。如：

She speaks English well.她英语说得好。

talk : 与 speak 意义相近，也着重说话的动作，而不着重所说的话，因此，一般也只用作不及物动词，不过，talk 暗示话是对某人说的，有较强的对话意味，着重指连续地和别人谈话。如：

I would like to talk to him about it.我想跟他谈那件事。

Old women like to talk with children.老年妇女喜欢和孩子们交谈。

tell : “告诉”，除较少情况外，一般后面总接双宾语。如： He‟s telling me a story.他在给我讲故事。tell a lie 撒谎

tell sb.to do sth./tell sb.not to do sth.Miss Zhao often tells us to study hard.4.do cooking/ do the cooking do cooking 作“做饭”解，属泛指。do the cooking 特指某一顿饭或某一家人的饭。cooking为动名词，不能用作复数，但前面可用 some, much修饰。从do some cooking可引出许多类似的短语：

do some washing 洗些衣服 do some shopping 买些东西 do some reading 读书 do some writing 写些东西 do some fishing 钓鱼

从以上短语可引申出另一类短语，不能用some, much或定冠词。go shopping 去买东西 go fishing 去钓鱼 go boating 去划船 go swimming 去游泳

5.like doing sth./ like to do sth.like doing sth.与like to do sth.意思相同，但用法有区别。前者强调一般性的爱好或者表示动作的习惯性和经常性；后来表示一次性和偶然性的动作。例如： He likes playing football, but he doesn„t like to play football with Li Ming.他喜欢踢足球，但是他不喜欢和李明踢。

6.other/ others/ the other/ another other表其余的，别的，Have you any other questions?你还有其他问题吗? others 别的人，别的东西

In the room some people are American, the others are French.在屋子里一些人是 美国人,其他的是法国人。

the other表另一个（二者之中）one…，the other…

One of my two brothers studies English, the other studies Chinese.我两个哥哥中的一个学习英文,另一个学中文。another表三者以上的另一个，另一些

There is room for another few books on the shelf.书架上还可以放点书。

7.in the tree/ on the tree in the tree 与 on the tree.译成中文均为“在树上”但英语中有区别。in the tree表示某人、某事（不属于树本身生长出的别的东西）落在树上，表示树的枝、叶、花、果等长在树上时，要使用on the tree.如：

There are some apples on the tree.那棵树上有些苹果。

There is a bird in the tree.那棵树上有只鸟。8.some/ any

(1)some和 any既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。但有以下两点需要

注意。

some常用于肯定句中，any常用于否定句和疑问句中。如： There is some water in the glass.Is there any water in the glass? There isn't any water in the glass.(2)在说话者希望得到肯定答复的一般疑问句中，或在表示请求，邀请的疑问句中，我们依然用some。如： Would you like some tea? 9.tall/ high

(1)说人，动物，树木等有生命的东西，主要用tall，不用high，例如

a tall woman 一个高个子妇女

a tall horse 一个高大的马

(2)说一个不与地面接触的人和物的高时，要用high，而不用tall，比如人站在桌子上时，飞机飞上天时，例如：

He is high up in the tree.他高高地爬在树上。

The plane is so high in the sky.飞机在空中这么高。

(3)指建筑物、山时要tall或high都可以，不过high的程度比tall高。

(4)high可作副词，tall不能。(5)tall的反义词为short, high的反义词为low.10.can/ could(1)can表示体力和脑力方面的能力，或根据客观条件能做某种动作的“能力

”。例如：

Can you ride a bike？ 你会骑自行车吗？

What can I do for you？ 要帮忙吗？

Can you make a cake？你会做蛋糕吗？

(2)can用在否定句和疑问句中时有时表示说话人的“怀疑”“猜测”或不肯定。例如： Where can he be？他会在什么地方呢？ Can the news be true？这个消息会是真的吗？

It surely can't be six o'clock already？不可能已经六点钟了吧？

You can't be hungry so soon，Tom，you've just had lunch.汤姆，你不可能饿得这么快，你刚吃过午饭。

What can he mean？他会是什么意思？

在日常会话中，can可代替may表示“允许”，may比较正式。例如： You can come in any time.你随时都可以来。---Can I use your pen？我能用你的钢笔吗？---Of course，you can.当然可以。

You can have my seat，I'm going now.我要走了，你坐我的座位吧。(3)could could 是 can的过去式，表示过去有过的能力和可能性（在否定和疑问句中）。例如：

The doctor said he could help him.（能力）医生说他能帮助他。

Lily could swim when she was four years old.（能力）

当丽丽四岁的时候她就会游泳。

At that time we thought the story could be true.（可能性）那时我们以为所说的可能是真的。

could可代替can表示现在时间的动作，但语气较为婉转。例如： Could I speak to John，please？我能和约翰说话吗？

Could you？在口语中表示请求对方做事。例如： Could you wait half an hour？请你等半个小时好吗？

Could you please ring again at six？六点钟请你再打电话好吗？(4)can的形式

只有现在式can和过去式could两种形式。能表示一般现在和一般过去两种时态，有时也能表示将来。所有其他时态（包括将来时）须用be able to加动词不定式来表示。例如：

They have not been able to come to Beijing.他们没有能到北京来。11.look for/ find look for 意为“寻找”，而find意为“找到，发现”，前者强调“找”这一动作，并不注重“找”的结果，而后者则强调“找”的结果。例如：

She can‟t find her ruler.她找不到她的尺子啦。Tom is looking for his watch，but he can‟t find it.汤姆正在寻找他的手表，但没能找到。12.be sleeping/ be asleep be sleeping 表示动作，意思是“正在睡觉”；be asleep 表示状态，意思是“睡着了”。如：---What are the children doing in the room? 孩子们在房间里做什么？---They are sleeping.他们正在睡觉。

The children are asleep now.现在孩子们睡着了。

13.often/ usually/sometimes often表示“经常”，sometimes表示“有时候”，在表示发生频率上often要高于usually，usually要高于sometimes。这三个词表示的是经常性，一般性的动作或情况，常与一般现在时连用，常位于主要谓语动词的前面，其他谓语动词（be动词，情态动词和助动词）的后面，有时也可位于句尾。如果要加强语气，则放在句首。

We usually play basketball after school.我们通常放学后打篮球。Sometimes I go to bed early.有时，我睡觉很早。

He often reads English in the morning.他经常在早晨读英语。14.How much/ How many how much常用来询问某一商品的价格，常见句式是How much is / are…? How much is the skirt? 这条裙子多少钱？ How much are the bananas? 这些香蕉多少钱？

how much后加不可数名词，表示数量，意为“多少“，how many后加可数名词的复数形式。

How much meat do you want? 你要多少肉呀？

How many students are there in your class? 你们班有多少人？

15.be good for/ be good to/ be good at be good for 表示“对……有好处”，而be bad for表示“对……有害”；be good to表示“对……友好”，而be bad to表示“对……不好”；be good at表示“擅长，在……方面做得好”，而be bad at表示“在……方面做得不好”。

Doing eye exercises is good for your eyes.做眼保健操对你的眼睛有好处。

Eating too much is bad for you health.吃的太多对你的身体有害。

Miss Li is good to all of us.李老师对我们所有的人都很友好。

The boss is bad to his workers.这个老板对他的工人不好。

Li Lei is good at drawing, but I'm bad at it.李雷擅长画画，但是我不擅长。

16.each/ every each 和every都有“每一个”的意思，但含义和用法不相同。each从个体着眼，every从整体着眼。each 可用于两者或两者以上，every只用于三者或三者以上。

We each have a new book.我们每人各有一本新书。

There are trees on each side of the street.街的两旁有树。

He gets up early every morning.每天早晨他都起得早。

each可以用作形容词、副词和代词；every只能用作形容词。

Each of them has his own duty.他们各人有各人的义务。

They each want to do something different.他们每个人都想做不同的事情。17.一般现在时/现在进行时

一般现在时表示经常性的或习惯性的动作或存在的状态，也表示说话者的能力，还有自然现象；而现在进行时表示正在进行或发生的动作（构成方式为am/is /are/+doing）。

I do my homework in the evening.我在晚上做作业。

I'm doing my homework now.我现在正在做作业。

现在进行时常与now, these days, at the moment 或Look, listen等词连用；而一般现在时常与often, always, sometimes, usually, every day, in the morning, on Mondays等连用。

We often clean the classroom after school.我们经常放学后打扫教室。

Look!They are cleaning the classroom.看！他们正在打扫教室呢。

初二年级（上）

【目录】

Unit 1 How often do you exercise? Unit 2 What's the matter? Unit 3 What are you doing for vacation? Unit 4 How do you get to school? Unit 5 Can you come to my party? Unit 6 I'm more outgoing than my sisiter.Review of units 1-6 Unit 7 How do you make a banana milk shake? Unit 8 How was your school trip? Unit 9 When was he born? Unit 10 I'm going to be a basketball player.Unit 11 Could you please clean your room? Unit 12 What's the best radio station?

【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

1.on time 2.best wishes 3.give a talk 4.for example 5.short for 6.a waste of time 7.go on a field trip 8.go fishing 9.I agree 10.next week 11.the day after tomorrow 12.have a picnic 13.have some problems doing sth.14.go the wrong way 15.hurry up 16.get together 17.in the open air 18.on Mid-Autumn Day 19.come over 20.have to 21.get home 22.agree with 23.in the country 24.in town 25.all the same 26.in front of 27.on the left/right side 28.next to 29.up and down 30.keep healthy 31.grow up 32.at the same time 33.the day before yesterday 35.last Saturday 36.half an hour ago 37.a moment ago 38.just now 39.by the way 40.all the time 41.at first II.重要句型

1.have fun doing sth.2.Why don‟t you…? 3.We‟re going to do sth.4.start with sth.5.Why not…?

6.Are you going to…? 7.be friendly to sb.8.You‟d better do sth.9.ask sb.for sth.10.say goodbye to sb.11.Good luck(with sb)!III.交际用语

1.Welcome backto school!2.Excuse me.I‟m sorry I‟m late, because the traffic is bad.3.It doesn‟t matter.4.Happy Teachers‟ Day!5.That‟s a good idea.6.What are you going to do？ 7.Where are we going ? 8.What are we going to do ? 9.I‟m good at…

10.It‟s not far from…

11.Are you free tomorrow evening? 12.Would you and Lily like to come over to my home for Mid-Autumn Festival? 13.I‟m glad you can come.14.Thanks for asking us.15.How about another one? 16.May I have a taste? 17.Let me walk with you.18.What do you have to do? 19.Do you live on a farm? 20.Which do you like better, the city or the country? 21.Which do you like best, dogs, cats or chickens? 22.Shall we go at ten? Good idea!23.---Let‟s make it half past one.---OK.24.---Why not come a little earlier?---All right.25.Excuse me.Where‟s the nearest post office, please? 26.It‟s over there on the right.27.I‟m sorry I don‟t know.28.You‟d better…

29.Thank you all the same.30.Which bus do I take? 31.Go along this road.32.What day was it yesterday? 33.I‟m sorry to hear that.34.I hope you‟re better now.35.Why did you call me? 36.I called to tell… IV.重要语法

1.be going to的用法；

2.形容词的比较级、最高级； 3.形容词和副词的比较 4.一般过去时 【名师讲解】

1.on the street / in the street 表示“在街上”时，on the street 和 in the street 都可以，在美国多用on the street, 在英国多用in the street.例如：

We have a house in the street.我们在街上有座房子。I met him on the street.我在街上遇见了他。

2.would like / like

would like 和 like含义不同。like 意思是“喜欢”，“爱好”，而 would like 意思是“想要”。试比较：

I like beer.=I‟m fond of beer.我喜欢喝啤酒。

I‟d like a glass of beer= I want a glass of beer.我想要一杯啤酒。

Do you like going to the cinema? 你喜欢看电影吗？

Would you like to go to the cinema tonight? 你今晚想去看电影吗？

3.another / the other(1)another 通常用于三个或三个以上或不确定数量中的任意一个人或 物体。例如： May I have another apple, please? 请在给我一个苹果好吗？

This coat is too small for me.Please show me another这件外套我穿太小，请再给我拿一件看看。

(2)the other 通常指两者中的另一个。例如：

He has two rulers.One is short.The other is long.他有两把尺子，一把短的，另一把长的。

I have two brothers.One works in Xi‟an.The other works in Beijing.我有两个兄弟，一个在西安工作，另一个在北京工作。4.have to /must

(1)have to和 must 都可以用来谈论义务，但用法略有不同。如果某人主观上觉得必须去做而又想去时，常用must。如果谈论某种来自“外界”的义务，常用have to。例如： I must stop smoking.我必须戒烟。（自己想戒烟）

They have to work for the boss.他们不得不为那个老板工作。（条件逼得他们去工作）

(2)have to 可用于多种时态，must 只能用于一般现在时。例如：

I‟ll have to get up early tomorrow morning.明天早晨我必须早早起床。

We had to work long hours every day in order to get more money.为了多挣钱，我们不得不每天长时间地工作。

(3)用于否定句时，mustn’t意思是“决不能”，“禁止”，而don’t have to意思是“不必”，相当于needn‟t。例如：

You mustn‟t be late again next time.下一次你决不能再迟到。

You don‟t have to go there today.You can go there tomorrow.你今天不必到那里去了。你可以明天去。

5.hear sb.or sth.doing sth./ herar sb.or sth.do sth.hear sb.or sth.doing sth.意思是“听到某人或某物在做某事”，而hear sb.or sth.do sth.意思是“听到某人或某物做过某事”。试比较：

I hear him singing an English song.听见他在唱英歌曲。I heard him sing an English song.我听见他唱一首英文歌。

类似hear 这种用法的还有see, watch, listen, feel等感官动词。6.any /some any和some 都可以同不可数名词和可数名词的复数形式连用，但some一般用在肯定句中；any用在疑问句和否定句中。试比较：

I want some money.我想要点钱。Have you any money? 你有钱吗？

I don‟t have any money.我一点钱也没有。

some 有时也用于疑问句，表示说话人期待一个肯定回答或鼓励人家说“是”。例如： Would you like some more beer?请你再来点啤酒好吗？ Could I have some rice, please?请给我来点米饭好吗？ 7.hear /listen to listen to 和hear 都有“听”的意思，但含义有所不同。Listen to强调“听”的动作，hear 强调“听”的结果。例如：

Listen to me ,please!I‟m going to tell you a story.请听我说！我给你们讲个故事。

Listen!Can you hear someone crying in the next room? 听！你能听见有人在隔壁房间里哭吗？

I listened, but heard nothing.我听了听，但什么也听不见。

hear 后面如果接宾语从句，常常表示“听说”。例如：

I hear some foreign students will visit our school.我听说一些外国学生将要访问我们学校。

I hear there is going to be a film in our school this evening.我听说今晚我们学校要演一场电影。

8.Let’s… /Let us…

Let’s… 和Let us… 都表示“让我们……”, 如果us 包括听话人在内，其含义相同，附带问句用shall we.如果us 不包括听话人在内，其含义不同，Let us…的附带问句要用will you。例如：

Let‟s go shopping, shall we? 我们去购物好吗？

9.take/ bring/ carry /get 这四个动词都有“拿”和“带”的意思，但含义有所不同。take意为“带走”，“拿走”，bring意为“带来”，“拿来”, get表示“到别的地方把某人或某物带来或拿来”，carry不强调方向，带有负重的意思。试比较：

My parents often take me there on holidays.我父母常常带我到那里去度假。I‟m going to take you to Beijing.我准备带你去北京。Bring me a cup of tea, please.请给我端杯茶来。

I‟ll bring the book to you tomorrow.明天我把那本书给你带来。The waiter carried the me to the table服务员把肉送到桌上。

The monkey carried the bag on her back.猴子把那个包背在背上。She went back to get her handbag.他折回去拿他的手提包。Let me get the doctor.让我去请医生吧。

10.far away /faraway

(1)far away是一个副词短语，意思是“很远”。例如：

Some are far away.Some are nearer.有些离得很远，有些离得近一些的。The village is far away from here.那个村子离这儿很远。

(2)faraway是一个形容词，意思是“遥远的”，可以在句中作定语。例如： He lives in faraway mountain village.他住在一个遥远的小山村。

11.find / look for find和look for 都有“找”的意思，但含义不同。find 强调“找”的结果，而look for 强调“找”的过程。请看下列例句：

He is looking for his bike.他在找他的自行车。

I‟m looking for my watch, but can‟t find it.我在找我的手表，但是找不到。I hope you will soon find your lost ring.希望你尽快找到丢失的戒指。另外，find还有“发现”；“感到”等意思。例如：

I found a wallet in the desk.我在课桌里发现了一个钱包。I find this book very interesting.我觉得这本书很有意思。12.in front of /in the front of In front of 表示在某物的前面，不在某物的范围内。In the front of 表示在某物的前部，在某物的范围内。试比较：

My seat is in front of Mary‟s.我的座位在玛丽座位的前面。

He is sitting in the front of the car with the driver.他和司机坐在小车的前部。【考点扫描】

1.be going to的用法；

2.形容词的比较级、最高级； 3.形容词和副词的比较 4.一般过去时 5.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 6.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

初二年级下（1-5）

【目录】

Unit 1 Will people have robots? Reading: Do you think you will have your own robot? Unit 2 What should I do? Reading: Maybe you should learn to relax!Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived? Reading: Do you remember what you were doing? Unit 4 He said I was hard-working.Reading: She said helping others changed her life.Unit 5 If you go to the party, you'll have a great time!Review of units 1-5

【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

1.give a concert 2.fall down 3.go on 4.at the end of 5.go back 6.in ahurry 7.write down 8.come out 9.all the year round 10.later on

11.at times 12.ring sb.up

13.Happy New Year!14.have a party 15.hold on 16.hear from 17.be ready 18.at the moment 19.take out

20.the same as 21.turn over 22.get-together 23.put on 24.take a seat 25.wait for 26.get lost 27.just then 28.first of all 29.go wrong 30.make a noise 31.get on 32.get off 33.stand in line 34.at the head of 35.laugh at 36.throw about 37.in fact 38.at midnight 39.enjoy oneself 40.have a headache 41.have a cough 42.fall asleep 43.again and again 44.look over 45.take exercise II.重要句型

1.be good for sth.2.I think … 3.I hope… 4.I love…

5.I don‟t like… 6.I‟m sure… 7.forget to do sth.8.take a message for sb.9.give sb.the message 10.help yourself to sth.11.be famous for sth.12.on one‟s way to… 13.make one‟s way to… 14.quarrel with sb.15.agree with sb.16.stop sb.from doing sth.III.交际用语

1.What‟s the weather like today? 2.It‟s cold, but quite suuny.3.How cold it is today!4.Yes, but it‟ll be warmer later on.5.Shall we make a snowman? 6.Ok.Come on!7.Happy New Year!8.May I speak to Ann, please?？

9.Hold on, please.10.Thanks a lot for inviting me to your party.11.Ok.But I‟m afraid I may be a little late.12.Can I take a message for you? 13.That‟s OK.It doesn‟t matter.14.I‟m very sorry, but I can‟t come.15.I‟m sorry to hear that.16.Happy birthday!17.Would you like...? Would you like to...? 18.Do you think...? Yes, I think so./ No, I don't think so.19.Do you agree? Yes, I agree./ No, don't really agree.I really can't agree.20.There are a few / a lot of.../ on it.21.So do we.22.I'm happy you like it.23.Which is the way to..., please? 24.Turn right/left at the...crossing.25.Go on until you reach...26.How can I get to...? Go down/up/along this road.27.What's the matter? 28.It'll take you half an hour to...29.We'd better catch a bus.30.It may be in...Ah, so it is 31.You must be more careful!32.You mustn't cross the road now.33.If you want to cross a street, you must wait for the green light.34.Please stand in line.35.You must wait for your turn.36.If you don't go soon, you'll be late.37.I don't feel very well.38.My head hurts.39.You mustn't eat anything until you see the doctor.40.What's the trouble? 41.What's the matter with…?

42.She didn't feel like eating anything.43.Nothing serious.44.Have/get a pain in… 45.No problem.46.Take this medicine three times a day.IV.重要语法 1.一般过去时；

2.反意疑问句的用法； 3.一般将来时； 4.感叹句；

5.简单句的五种基本句型； 6.情态动词can, may和must, have to的用法； 7.时间状语从句和条件状语从句。【名师讲解】

1.above/ over/ on

这三个介词都表示“在……之上”，但含义不同。on指在某物的表面上，和某物接触；above指在某物的上方，不和某物接触，但也不一定在某物的正上方；over指在某物的正上方，不和某物接触。试比较：

There is a book on the desk.课桌上有一本书。

I raise my right hand above my head.我把右手高举过头。There is a stone bridge over the river.河面上有座石桥。

2.forget to do sth./forget doing sth.forget to do sth.意思是“忘记做某事”，实际上还没做；forget doing sth,意思是“忘记做过某事”，实际上已经做过了。试比较：

I forgot to tell him the news.我忘记告诉他这条消息了。

I forgot telling him the news.我已经把这条消息告诉他了，我却忘了。类似的词还有：remember, regret等。

3.hope/wish hope和wish 在汉语中都有“希望”的意思，但其含义和用法有所不同。主要区别如下：(1)wish可以用来表示不可实现的愿望；hope只能用来表示可能实现的愿望。例如： I wish I were 20 years younger.我但愿自己能年轻二十岁。

I hope you‟ll be better soon.我希望你能很快好起来。I wish the weather wasn‟t so cold.但愿天气不这麽冷。I hope he will come, too.我希望他也能来。

(2)wish可以接sb.to do sth.的结构，而hope不可以。例如： Do you wish me to come back later? 你是否希望我再来？ 4.be sure to do sth./ be sure of/about sb.or sth.(1)be sure to do sth.可以用来表示说话人给对方提出要求，意思是“务必”，也可以用来表示说话人做出的推断，意思是“一定”，“肯定”。例如：

Be sure to lock the door when you leave.你离开时务必把门锁好。

It‟s a good film.You are sure to enjoy it.这是一部好电影，你肯定会喜欢的。(2)be sure of/about sb.or sth.可用来表示“某人对某事有把握”。例如： I‟m sure of his success.我相信他会成功。

I think it was three years ago, but I‟m not sure about it.我想那是三年前的事情，但我没有把握。5.hear from/hear of

hear意思是“听到”，从哪里听到要用from来表示。例如： I‟ve heard from Xiao Wu that we‟ll start out military training tomorrow.我听小吴说，我们明天开始军训。

Listen to the tape and write out what you hear from Han Mei.听录音，并写出你从韩梅那里听到的内容。

hear from还有一个意思是“收到某人的来信”（=receive a letter from sb.）。例如： I heard from my pen friend in the U.S.A.last month.上个月我受到了美国笔友的来信。

I heard from her last week.我上周接到了她的来信。

hear of和和hear from含义不同。hear of 意思是“听说”，“得知”（某事或某人的存在），常用在疑问句和否定句里。例如：

Who is he? I‟ve never heard of him.他是谁？我从来没有听说过他。I never heard of such a thing!这样的事我从来没有听说过。

6.It’s a pleasure./With pleasure.It’s a pleasure这句话常用作别人向你表示致谢时的答语，意思是“那是我乐意做的”。例如：

---Thank you for helping me.谢谢你地帮助。---It‟s a pleasure.那是我乐意做的。---Thanks a lot.Bye.非常感谢。再见。---It‟s a pleasure.那是我乐意做的。再见。

类似的话还有 “Not at all.” “You are welcome.” “That‟s all right.”

With pleasure也用作客气的答语，主要用在别人要你做某事，而你又非常愿意去做的场合。例如：

---Will you please pass me the newspaper, please?

请你把报纸递给我好吗？---With pleasure.当然可以。7.seem/look(1)二者都可以作“看起来”讲，但seem暗示凭借一些迹象作出的有根据的判断，这种判断往往接近事实；look着重强调由视觉得出的印象。两者都可跟(to be)+形容词和as if从句。如：

He seems / looks(to be)very happy today.他今天看起来很高兴。It looks(seems)as if it it is going to rain.好像要下雨了。(2)但下列情况中只用seem不用look：

1)后跟不定式to do时。如：

He seems to know the answer.他似乎知道答案。2)在It seems that...结构中。如：

It seems that he is happier now than yesterday.他像比昨天高兴些了。

8.be ready to do/be ready for/ get ready to do/get ready for(1)be ready to do和be ready for…表示“已作好…的准备”，强调状态(2)get ready to do和get ready for…表示“为…做准备”，强调行为。如：

I'm ready to do anything you want me to do.我愿意/随时准备做一切做你要我做的事。I'm ready for any questions you may ask.我愿意/随时准备回答你可能问的问题。He's getting ready to leave for Tokyo.他正准备动身去东京。

Let's get ready for the hard moment.我们为这一艰难时刻作好准备吧。

(3)be ready to do 通常可理解“乐于做某事”，即思想上总是有做某事的准备。be not ready to do表示 “不轻易做某事”。如：

He's usually not ready to listen to others.他通常不轻易听从别人。9.at table/at the table at table在吃饭，at the table在桌子旁边。例如： The Greens are at table.格林一家人在吃饭。

Mr.Black is sitting at the table and reading a book.布莱克先生坐在桌旁读书。10.reach, arrive/get to

三者都有“到达”之意。reach是及物动词，后直接加名词，get和arrive是不及物动词，不能直接加名词，须借助于介词。get to后加名词地点，若跟副词地点时，to去掉；arrive at +小地方，arrive in+大地方。如：

Lucy got to the zoo before 8 o'clock.露西8点前到了动物园。

When did your parents arrive in Shanghai? 你父母何时到上海的？

It was late when I got home.我到家时天色已晚。

11.sick/ill

二者都是形容词。当“生病的，患病“之意时，ill只作表语，不作定语；而sick既可作表语也可作定语。sick有“呕吐，恶心”的意思，只能作表语，而ill无此意。如：

Li Lei was ill last week.(只作表语)李磊上周生病了。

He's a sick man.（作定语）他是病人。不能说成：He's an ill man.My grandfather was sick for a month last year.（作表语）我祖父去年病了一个

月。12.in time/on time

in time是“及时”的意思，on time是“准时，按时”。如： I didn't get to the bus stop in time.我没有及时赶上汽车。We'll finish our job on time.我们要按时完成任务。

13.may be/maybe

It may be in your inside pocket.= Maybe it is in your inside pocket.也许在你里边的口袋里。第一句中may be是情态动词+be 动词构成的谓语部分，意思是“也许是”，“可能是”；第二句中的maybe是副词，意思是“可能”，常位于句首，不能位于句中，相当于另一副词perhaps。再如：

Maybe you put it in that bag.也许你放在了那只包里。（不能说You maybe put it in that bag.）

It may be a hat.那可能是顶帽子。（不能说It maybe a hat.或It maybe is a hat.）14.noise/ voice/ sound

noise 指嘈杂声，噪音大的吵杂声。voice是指说话的声音，嗓音，嗓子。sound是指耳朵能够听到的声音、闹声等。它是表示声音之意的最普通的字。有时还用作科学上的声音。例如：

Don't make so much noise!别那么大声喧哗！

I didn't recognize John's voice on the telephone.在电话里我听不出约翰的声

音。

He spoke in a low voice.他低声说话。

We heard a strange sound.我们听到了一种奇怪的声音。

Sound travels fast, but light travels faster.声音传得快，但是光传得更快。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.一般过去时；

2.反意疑问句的用法； 3.一般将来时； 4.感叹句；

5.简单句的五种基本句型；

6.情态动词can, may和must, have to的用法； 7.时间状语从句和条件状语从句； 8.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 9.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

初二英语（6-10）【目录】

Unit 6 How long have you been collecting shells? Reading: I've been studying history in China.Unit 7 Would you mind turning down the music? Reading: Would you mind keeping your voice down? Unit 18 Why don't you get her a scarf? Reading: Why don't you learn to sing English songs? Unit 9 Have you ever been to an amusement park? Reading: Have you ever been to Singapore? Unit 10 It's a nice day, isn't it?

【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.on time 2.out of 3.all by oneself 4.lots of 5.no longer 6.get back 7.sooner or later 8.run away 9.eat up 10.take care of 11.turn off 12.turn on 13.after a while 14.make faces

15.teach oneself 16.fall off 17.play the piano 18.knock at 19.to one's surprise 20.look up 21.enjoy oneself 22.help yourself 23.tell a story / stories 24.leave....behind …… 25.come along

26.hold a sports meeting 27.be neck and neck 28.as...as 29.not so / as...as 30.do one's best 31.take part in 32.a moment late 33.Bad luck!34.fall behind 35.high jump 36.long jump 37.relay race 38.well done!39.take off 40.as usual 41.a pair of 42.at once 43.hurry off 44.come to oneself 45.after a while 46.knock on 47.take care of 48.at the moment 49.set off 50.here and there 51.on watch 52.look out 53.take one‟s place II.重要句型

1.We‟d better not do sth.2.leave one.oneself 3.find one‟s way to a place 4.stand on one‟s head 5.make sb.Happy 6.catch up with sb.7.pass on sth.to somebody 8.spend time doing sth.9.go on doing sth.10.get on well with sb.11.be angry with sb.12.be fed up with sth.13.not…until… 14.make room for sb.III.交际用语

1.We‟re all by ourselves.2.I fell a little afraid.3.Don‟t be afraid.4.Help!5.Can‟t you hear anything?

6.I can‟t hear anything / anybody there.7.Maybe it‟s a tiger.8.Let‟s get it back before they eat the food.9.Did she learn all by herself? 10.Could she swim when she was …years old? 11.She didn‟t hurt herself.12.He couldn‟t buy himself many nice things.13.Did he enjoy himself? 14.Help yourselves.15.Bad luck!16.Come on!17.Well done!Congratulations(to…)!18.It must be very interesting.19.I don‟t think you‟ll like it.20.It seems to be an interesting book.21.I‟m sure(that)… I‟m not sure if… I‟m not sure what to… 22.I hope so.23.What was he/she drawing when…? 24.I‟m sorry to trouble you.25.Would you please…?

26.What were you doing at ten o‟clock yesterday morning? 27.You look tired today.28.You‟d better go to bed early tonight, if you can.29.How kind!30.Let‟s move the bag, or it may cause an accident.31.It‟s really nice of you.32.Don‟t mention it.33.Don‟t crowd around him.IV.重要语法

1.不定代词/副词的运用；

2.反身代词的用法； 3.并列句；

4.形容词和副词的比较等级； 5.冠词的用法；

6.动词的过去进行时； 【名师讲解】 1.bring/take Bring表示“带来、拿来”，指从别处朝说话人所在或将在的地方“带来、拿来”。而take则表示“拿去、带走”，它表示的方向与bring相反，指从说话人所在地“拿走、带走”。如： Bring me the book, please.把那本书给我拿来。Take some food to the old man.给那位老人带去些食物。2.somebody/ anybody/nobody

一般说来，somebody用于定句，anybody用于否定句、疑问句和条件状语从句。例如： Somebody came to see you when you were out.你出来时有人来见你。

Does anybody live on this island? 有人在这岛上住吗？

I didn't see anybody there.我在那儿谁也没看见。

Don't let anybody in.I'm too busy to see anybody.别让任何人进来。我太忙，谁也不想见。

There is nobody in the room.房间里没人。

Nobody told me that you were ill, so I didn't know about it.谁也没告诉我你病了。所以我不知道。

3.listen, listen to, hear

这三个词意思都是“听”，但是它们的用法不完全相同。它们的区别在于：

(1)listen 只用于不及物动词，后面接人或人物做宾语，着重于“倾听”，指的是有意识的动作，至于是否听到，并非强调的重点。如：

Listen!Someone is singing in the classroom.听！有人在教室唱歌。

(2)listen to 为listen的及物形式，后面一定要接人或物做宾语，这里的to是介词。如： Do you like listening to light music?你喜欢听轻音乐吗？

(3)hear 可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词，意思是“听到、听见”，指用耳朵听到了某个声音，表示无意识的动作，着重于听的能力和结果。如： We hear with our ears.我们用耳朵听。

She listens but hears nothing.她听了听，但是什么也没有听见。4.many/ much/ a few/ a little/ few/ little(1)many修饰可数名词，much修饰不可数名词；都表示许多。例如：

He has many books.他有许多书。

He drank much milk.他喝了许多牛奶。

(2)a few和a little都表示“有一点儿”，侧重于肯定，相当于“some”，但a few修 饰可数名词，a little修饰不可数名词，例如： He has a few friends in London.他在伦敦有一些朋友。

Would you like some coffee? Yes, just a little.喝点咖啡好吗？好的，只要一点。(3)few和little表示“几乎没有”，侧重否定。few后接可数名词，little后接不可数名词。例如：

He is a strange man.He has few words.他是个怪人，他几乎不说什么话。Hurry up, there is little time left.赶快，没什么时间了。

5.either/ neither/ both

either可作形容词，一般指“两者中的任何一个”。有时也可表示“两个都……”的意思，后跟名词的单数形式；neither: 指两者中没有一个，全否定；both: 指两者都，肯定。句中可作主语、宾语和定语，both后面应跟名词的复数形式。如：

Neither of the films is good.两部电影都不好。（没有一部是好的）

Either of the films is good.两部电影都不错。（谓语动词用单数）

Both the teachers often answer the questions.这两个老师都常常解答问题。6.take part in/join

take part in参加某种活动;join参加，加入某一政党或组织。例如： Can you take part in my party.你能来参加我的派对吗？

We often take part in many school activities.我们经常参加学校里的一些活动。He joined the party in 1963.他1963年入的党。

My little brother joined the army last year.我小弟去年参的军。7.quite/ rather/ very(1)quite 表示程度“很，十分，完全地”，“相当”。如： She is quite right.她对极了。

That's not quite what I want.那并不完全是我所要的。

(2)rather 表示程度上的“相当”，比预想地程度要大，通常用在不喜欢的情况下。如：It's rather cold today.今天的天气相当冷。

(3)very表示程度“很，甚，极其，非常”，用于修饰形容词或副词，既可用在喜欢的情况下，也可用于不喜欢的情况下。应注意“a very +形容词+可数名词的单数”结构中，“a”应置于“very”之前，该结构相当“quite a/an +形容词+名词”的结构。如： Two months is quite a long time./ a very long time.两个月是一段很长的时间。It's a very nice day / quite a nice day.今天天气很好。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.不定代词/副词的运用；

2.反身代词的用法； 3.并列句；

4.形容词和副词的比较等级； 5.冠词的用法；

6.动词的过去进行时；

7.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 8.本单元学过的日常交际用语。

考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。

初三年级（1-5）

【目录】

Unit 1 How do you study for a test? Reading: How do we deal with our problems? Unit 2 I used to be afraid of the dark.Reading: He used to cause a lot of trouble.Unit 3 Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes.Reading: Should be allowed to make my own decisions? Unit 4 What would you do？

Reading：What would you do if...? Unit 5 It must belong to Carla.【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

1.at the moment

2.used to 3.for a while

4.walk away with sth.5.leave for some place 6.sooner or later 7.pay for

8.come up with an idea 9.think of 10.have a try

11.all over the world 12.be famous for 13.large numbers of 14.all the year round 15.no matter what 16.give up 17.for example 18.by the way 19.on business 20.so far 21.come true 22.set off 23.slow down 24.go on doing 25.wait for 26.be proud of 27.be afraid of 28.speak highly of 29.a year and a half 30.half a year 31.pick up 32.as soon as 33.keep… clean 34.take care of 35.cut down

36.make a contribution to 37.base on 38.make sure 39.take away 40.begin with 41.right now 42.as soon as possible 43.leave a message 44.all kinds of things 45.walk around 46.fall asleep 47.wake up 48.go on a trip 49.have a good time 50.take photos 51.come out 52.come on

53.have a family meeting 54.talk about 55.go for a holiday 56 go scuba diving 57.write down 58.by oneself 59.walk along

60.get a chance to do sth 61.have a wonderful time 62.book a room 63.have an accident 64.be interested in 65.use sth.to do sth.66.make a TV show 67.be amazed at 68.take part in 69.feed on 70.get out of II.重要句型

1.Why don‟t you do sth.?

2.make sb.Happy 3.borrow sth.from sb.4.forget to do sth.5.pay fro sth.6.return sth.To sb.7.learn sth.from sb.8.be famous for sth.9.No matter what…

10.be with sb.11.go on doing sth.12.speak highly of sb.13.keep doing sth.14.allow sb.To do sth.15.encourage sb.to do sth.16.It is said that… III.交际用语

1.---Excuse me, have you got …?---Yes, I have.(Sorry, I haven‟t.)2.---Why don‟t you …?---Thanks, I will.3.---Thanks a lot.(Thank you very much.)---You are welcome.4.---Have you ever done…?

---Yes, I have, once.(No, never.)5.---I‟ve just done…---Really? 6.---What‟s …like ?

7.---How long have you been…?---Since…

8.---Have you ever been to…?

---I‟ve never been there.(None of us has./ Only …has.)9.---Would you like to have a try?---I don‟t think I can…

10.---What have you done since…?

11.---How long have you been at this …?---For…

12.---How long has she/ he worked there…?

---She‟s / He‟s worked there for… / all her / his life.13.---I‟m sorry he isn‟t here right now.14.---May I help you? 15.---That‟s very kind of you.16.---Could we go scuba diving? 17.---Could you tell us how long we‟re going to be away? 18.---Let‟s try to find some information about it, OK? 19.---Could you please tell me how to search the Internet? 20.---Go straight along here.21.---Please go to Gate 12.22.---Please come this way.23.---Could you tell me what you think about Hainan Island? 24.---That sounds really cool!IV.重要语法 1.宾语从句

2.现在完成时

3.一般过去时与现在完成时的用法比较： 【名师讲解】 1.Maybe/ may be

(1)maybe是副词，意思是“大概，也许”，常用作状语。

Maybe you put it in your bag.也许你把它放在包里了。

“Will he come tomorrow?”“Maybe not.” “他明天来吗？”“也许不”。

(2)may be相当于是情态动词may与be动词搭配一起作谓语，意思是“也许是…，可能是…”。

It may be 9:00 when they arrive.他们可能于九点到达。The man may be a lawyer.那人也许是律师。2.borrow/ lend/ keep/ use

(1)borrow表示的是从别人那里借来东西，即我们通常所说的“借进来”。We often borrow books from our school library.我们经常从学校图书馆借书。I borrowed this dictionary from my teacher.我从老师那儿借来了这本字典。borrow是一个瞬间完成的动作，因此不能与时间段连用。You can borrow my recorder for three days.(错误)I have borrowed this book for only one week.(错误)

(2)lend表示的是把自己的东西借给别人，即我们通常所说的“借出去”。Thank you for lending me your bike.谢谢你把自行车借给我。He often lends money to his brother.他经常借钱给他弟弟。

lend与borrow一样，也是一个瞬间完成的 动作，不能与一段时间连用。

(3)keep的意思也是“借”，但一般是指借来后的保存或使用阶段，是一段持续的时间，因此可以与时 间段连用。

You can keep my recorder for three days.我的录音机你可以借用三天。I have kept this book for only one week.这本书我才刚借了一星期。(4)use也可以当“借用”讲，但它的本意是“用，使用”。May I use your ruler? 我能借你的尺子用一下吗？

He had to use this public telephone.他不得不使用这部公用电话。3.leave/ leave for

(1)leave意思是“离开，留下”。

We left Shanghai two years ago.我们两年前离开了上海。

He left his cell phone in the taxi last week.他上周把手机落在出租车里了。(2)leave for意思是“前往”，表示要去的目的地。

We will leave for Tibet next month.我们将于下月去西藏。The train is leaving for Moscow.这趟火车即将开往莫斯科。4.since/ for

(1)since用于完成时态，既能用作介词，也能用作连词，后常接时间点，意思是“自从”。

He has been a worker since he came into this city.自从他来到这个城市，他就是工人了。

I have never seen him since we last met in Shanghai.自从我们上次在上海见过之后，我再也没见过他。since作连词，还有“既然”的意思。

Since you are interested in it, just do it.既然你对它感兴趣，那就做吧。

You can have fun now since you‟ve finished your work.既然你已经做完了功课，就开心玩会儿吧。

(2)for用于完成时，用作介词，后常接一段时间，意思是“经过…”。

I have learned English for five years.我已经学了五年英语了。They have waited for you for 30 minutes.他们已经等了你三十分钟了。for也可以用作连词，但意思是“因为”。

They missed the flight for they were late.他们由于完到了而误了航班。He fell ill for many reasons.他由于多种原因病倒了。5.neither/ either/ both(1)neither作代词是对两者都进行否定，意思为“两者都不”，作主语时谓语动词用单数.Neither of the boys is from England.这两个男孩都不是来自英国。I know neither of them.他们两个我都不认识。

neither用作形容词，也修饰单数名词，意思与作代词时相同；用作连词时，一般与nor搭配，表示 “既不…也不”。作主语时，谓语动词也遵循就近原则。

She neither ate nor drank yesterday.她昨天既不吃也不喝。

Neither he nor we play football on Sundays.他和我们星期天都不踢球。

(2)either作代词时，是指两者中的任意一方,(两者之)每一个，故作主语时谓语动词用单数.Either of the books is new.这两本书任何一本都是新的.She doesn‟t like either of the films.这两部电影她都不喜欢.either作形容词, 用来修饰单数名词,意思与作介词时相同.Either school is near my home.(这两所学校中的)任何一所学校都离我家很近.Either question is difficult.两个问题(中的任何一个)都难.either作连词时,一般与or搭配,表示两者选其一，意思是“不是…就是”。作主语时，谓语动词遵循就近原则。

Either he or I am right.不是他就是我是对的。

Either my sister or my parents are coming to see me.不是我姐姐就是我父母要来

看我。

(3)both作代词时，指的是所涉及到的“两者都”, 故作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。

I like both of the stories.这两个故事我都喜欢。Both of my parents are teachers.我父母两人都是老师。both作形容词时，用来修饰两者,意思与作代词时相同.Both his arms are hurt.他的两只胳膊都受伤了。

Both these students are good at English.这两个学生都擅长英语。

both用作连词时，多与and搭配，表示“既…又, 不仅…而且”, 作主语时,谓语动词仍用复数形式。

Both piano and violin are my bobbies.钢琴和小提琴都是我的爱好。They study both history and physics.他们既学历史，又学物理。

6.find/look for/ find out

(1)find强调找的结果，意思是“找到”。此外还有“发现，发觉”的意思，后可接宾语从句。

Jim couldn‟t find his hat.吉姆找不着帽子了。

Have you found your lost keys? 你找到丢失的钥匙了吗？ He found the lights were on along the street.他发现沿街的灯都亮了

(2)look for的意思为“寻找”，指的是找的动作而非结果。另外，还有“盼望，期待”的意思。

She is looking for her son.她正在找她的儿子。

We‟ve been looking for the car since early this morning.我们从今天一大早就开始找这辆车了。

I look for the coming holiday.我期待着即将来临的假期。

(3)find out含有经过观察、研究或探索而得知的意思，后常接较抽象的事物，意思是“找出，发现，查明（真相）”等。I can find out who took my money away.我能查出谁拿了我的钱。Could you find out when the plane arrives? 你能设法知道飞机何时到吗？

7.forget to do/ forget doing

(1)forget to do是指忘记去做某件事了，即该事还没有做。

Please don‟t forget to call this afternoon.今天下午不要忘了给我打电话。I forgot to take some small change with me.我身上忘了带零钱了。

(2)forget doing是指忘记某件已经做过的事情，即该事已经做了，但被忘记了。

He forgot telling me his address.他忘了告诉过我地址了。They forgot having been here before.他们忘了以前曾来过这儿。8.stop doing/ stop to do

(1)stop doing是指停止做某事，即doing这个动作不再继续。They stopped debating.他们停止了辩论。（不辩论了）

He had to stop driving as the traffic lights changed in to red.由于交通灯变成了红色，他不得不停车。

(2)stop to do是指停下来开始做另一件事，即停止原先的事，开始做do这个动作。

She stopped to have a rest.她停下来休息会儿。（开始休息）They stopped to talk.他们停下来开始交谈。9.except/ besides

(1)except是指不包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“撇开…不谈”,表示两部分的不同。

Everyone is excited except me.除我以外的每个人都很激动。（他们激动，而我却不激动）All the visitors are Japanese except him.除他以外的所有游客都是日本人。（其他人是日本人，可他不是）

(2)besides是包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“除之外…还、除之外…又”，表示两部分 的相似性。

Twenty-five students went to the cinema besides him.除他以外，还有25个学生去看了电影。(他和另外25人都去了)We like biology besides English.除了英语外，我们还喜欢生物。（生物和英语都喜欢）

besides还可用作副词，意思是“此外；而且”，常用于句首或句尾。He is a great thinker, and besides, he is a politician.他是一名伟大的思想家，除此以外，他还是一位政治家。

They encouraged me, and they supported me with money, besides.他们不仅鼓励我，而且与我以金钱上的支持。

10.keep doing/ keep on doing

(1)keep doing指的是连续地、坚持不断地做某事，中间不间断。

It kept blowing for a whole day.刮了一整天风了。The temperature keeps dropping.温度持续下降。(2)keep on doing是指反复坚持做某事，但动作之间略有间隔。

They have kept on writing to each other for many years.他们已经互相通信多年了。After drinking some water, he kept on talking.喝了一些水后，他坚持讲话。11.seem/ look

(1)seem一般着重于以客观迹象为依据，意思是“似乎、好象、看起来…”。

The baby seems to be happy.婴儿看上去似乎很高兴。He seemed to be sorry for that.他似乎为那件事感到抱歉。seem能与to do结构连用，而look不能。

It seems to rain.似乎要下雨了。

They seemed to have finished their work.他们似乎已经完成了工作。在it作形式主语的句型中只能用seem。

It seems that he is quite busy now.他现在看起来很忙。

It seems to us that there is nothing serious.在我看来没什么大不了的。

(2)look用作“看起来；好像”时，常从物体的外观或样貌上来判断，是以视觉所接受的印象为依据的。

The room looks clean.这间房看起来很干净。

The girl looks like her mother.那女孩看起来向她的妈妈。12.such/ so

(1)such常用作形容词，用来修饰名词。

Don‟t be such a fool.别这么傻。

He is such a clever boy.他是如此聪明的一个男孩。

(2)so是副词，用来修饰形容词或副词。

He is so kind!他真好心！

Why did you come so late? 你为何回来得如此晚？

当名词前有many, much, few, little等表示多、少时，应该用so。

He has so many friends.他有如此多的朋友。

Only so little time is left!才剩这么一点儿时间！13.either/ too/ also

(1)either用作“也”时是副词，常用于否定句句尾。

She is not a Japanese, I‟m not, either.她不是日本人，我也不是。My sister doesn‟t like this song, either.我妹妹也不喜欢这首歌。(2)too常用于肯定句或疑问句尾，表示“也”。He likes China, too.他也喜欢中国。Are you in Grade 3, too? 你也在三年级吗？(3)also也常用于肯定句或疑问句，但一般位于句中。We are also students.我们也是学生。He also went there on foot.他也是走着去的。Did you also want to have a look? 你也想看看吗？

14.if/ whether

在下列情况下只能用whether而非if：

(1)与or not连用时，只能用whether.We want to know whether you are ill or not.我们想知道你是否生病了。Please tell me whether or not you have finished your work.请告诉我们你是否完成了工作。(2)后接动词不定式时，只能用whether.Adam didn‟t know whether to go or stay.亚当不知道是走还是留。

He hasn‟t decided whether to have dinner with me.他还没决定是否和我共进晚

餐。

(3)所引导的宾语从句放在主句之前时，只能用whether.Whether it will rain or snow, we don‟t mind.我们不在乎将要刮风还是下雨。Whether I won or lost, she didn‟t want to know.我是赢是输她不想知道。(4)引导主语从句或表语从句时，一般用whether.The most important was whether they had gone.最重要的是他们是不是已经

走了。

Whether he will go with me is a secret.他是否会和我一起去还是个秘密。if能引导条件状语从句，表示“如果，假如”，而whether没有此用法。We‟ll have a football match if it doesn‟t rain tomorrow.如果明天不下雨，我们

要进行足球赛。

I‟ll tell him if I sees him.我看见他就告诉他。

If you‟re in danger, please call 110.如果你遇到危险，请拨打110。15.cost/ spend/ pay/ take

(1)cost一般用某物来做主语，表示“（某物）值…、花费…”，既能指花费时 间也能指金钱。

The new bike costs me 300 yuan.这辆新自行车花了我三百元。

It will cost you a whole to read through this book.通读这本书将会花费你整整 一周时间。

cost 还可以用作名词，表示“成本、费用、价格、代价”等。What‟s the cost of this TV set? 这台电视机的成本是多少钱？ They succeeded at the cost of hard work.他们辛苦地工作换来的成功。

(2)spend一般用某人来作主语，表示“（某人）花费…，付出…”，也能指时间或金钱，指时间时常与 in搭配，指金钱时常与on或for搭配。

We spent two days in repairing this machine.我们花了两天时间修理这台机器。

Mr.Lee spends $20 on books every month.李先生每月花二十美元在书上。

(3)pay用作动词时，一般也以某人作主语，但一般指花钱、付款等，很少用来指花费时间。常与for搭配使用。

They paid 70 yuan for the tickets.他们花了七十元买票。He was too poor to pay for his schooling.他穷得交不起学费。pay还可以用作名词，意思为“薪水、工资”等。

It‟s hard for me to live with such low pay.我很难靠这么低的薪水生活下去。(4)take也指“花费(时间、金钱)”，但通常用某事、某物做主语，或用形式主语it.How long will the meeting take? 会议要开多久？

It took me several hours to get there.我花了几个小时才到那儿。16.bad/ badly

这两个词的意思含有“坏、糟、严重”等意思，且它们有共同的比较级worse和最高级worst。

(1)bad是一个形容词，意思是“坏的，糟糕的，差的，严重的”。

I don‟t think he is a bad person.我并不认为他是一个坏人。I had a bad headache.我的头疼得很厉害。

(2)badly是一个副词，意思是“不好地，差”，也可以表示程度，意为“严重地，非常，极度”。

We need help badly.我们急需帮助。

His arm was badly hurt.他的胳膊严重受伤了。17.interested/ interesting

(1)interested是指“对…产生兴趣的，对…感兴趣的”，一般用人做主语，后常用介词in.He was interested in biology before.他以前对生物感兴趣。

I‟m not interested in art.我对艺术不感兴趣。

(2)interesting的意思是“有趣的”，指能够给人带来兴趣的某人或某事物。

He is an interesting old man.他是个有趣的老头。

The interesting story attracted me.这个有趣的故事吸引了我。18.dead/ die/ death/ dying

(1)dead是形容词，意思为“死了的、无生命的”，表示状态，可以与一段时间连用。

The tree has been dead for ten years.这棵树死了有十年了。The rabbits are all dead.这些兔子都是死的。

(2)die是动词，意思为“死、死亡”，是一个瞬间动词，不能与一段时间连用。

My grandpa died two years ago.我爷爷两年前去世了。The old man died of cancer.老人死于癌症。(3)death是名词，意思为“死亡、去世”等。

The memorial hall was built one year after his death.他死后一年，纪念馆建成了。

His death is a great loss to us.他的死是我们的巨大损失。

(4)dying 是die的现在分词，用作形容词，意思是“垂死的、即将死去的”。

The doctors have saved the dying man.医生们救活了那个垂死的人。The poor dog had no food, it was dying.可怜的狗没有食物,快要饿死了。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.宾语从句的时态和语序；

2.一般过去时和过去完成时的用法区别； 3.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 4.本单元学习的日常交际用语。

初三年级（6-10）【目录】

Unit 6 I like music that I can dance to.Reading: I only eat food that tastes good.Unit 7 Where would you like to visit? Reading: I'd love to sail across the Pacific.Unit 8 I'll help clean up the city parks.Reading: I'll send you a photo of Lucky.Unit 9 When was it invented? Reading: Do you know when basketball was invented? Unit 10 By the time I got outside, the bus had already left.【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.give up 2.try out 3.most of 4.not…any more 5.at the age of 6.at that time

7.send message by telegraph 8.graduate from 9.turn down 10.put up 11.at the top of 12.get together 13.from house to house 14.at the end of 15.on top of 16.as well 17.climb down 18.in a single night 19.even though 20.live on 21.once upon a time 22.according to 23.keep warm 24.on the other hand 25.on show 26.on display 27.in the future 28.look up 29.Tree Planting Day 30.just right

31.as often as possible 32.wash away 33.in this way 34.in a few years' time 35.point to 36.thanks to 37.more or less 38.so far 39.shut down 40.send up 41.put off II.重要句型

1.set one's mind to do sth.2.put … together 3.stop…from… 4.keep…from… 5.be filled with sth.6.give birth to 7.be covered with 8.be made of 9.fill…with… 10.match…with 11.be used for 12.have nothing to do with 13.come up with 14.no matter how… 15.keep sb./sth.warm III.交际用语 1.---I'm trying to … 2.---I'll …

3.---Which of these would you like most to …? 4.---What do you want to … ? 5.---I want to… 6.---I hope to … 7.---I plan to… 8.---I'm going to… 9.---I'm so happy that … 10.---I'm glad ….11.---me too.12.---What's this called in English? 13.---What's it made of? 14.---It's made of … 15.---What's it used for? 16.---It's used for …

17.---English is widely used for business/ …

18.---It is one of the world's most important languages as it is so widely used.19.---Where is / are … grown / produced / made ? 20.---The(ground)must be just right… 21.---It's best to …

22.---The hole should not be too deep.23.---The Great Green Wall is 7000 kilometres long, and between 400 and 1700 kilometres wide.24.---The more, the better.25.---More or less!

26.---The(ground)must be just right… 27.---The hole should not be too deep.28.掌握以下常见标志：

ENTRANCE EXIT PUSH PULL NO SMOKING NO PARKING FRAGILE THIS SIDE UP NO PHOTOS DANGER BUSINESS HOURS PLAY STOP PAUSE ON OFF IV.重要语法

1.动词被动语态的结构和用法； 2.动词不定式的功能和用法。【名师讲解】 1.be able to/ can

(1)都能表示“能够，具备干某件事的能力”这个含义，此时可以互换。

Mr.Green is able to finish the work on time.= Mr.Green can finish the work on time.格林先生能够按时完成这项工作。

(2)be able to可以用于各种时态，而can 为情态动词，多用于现在时，其过去式为could。

We are sure he will be able to be an artist when he grows up.我们相信他长大后能够成为一名画家。Miss Lin has been able to pay the car by herself.林小姐已经能够自己负担那辆车了。

(4)Can除了表示“能够，有能力做某事”以外，还有如下用法，而be able to 则没有。表示请求，但语 气没有could委婉

Can I have a look at this picture? 我能看看这张图片吗？

Can we leave school after 6:00 p.m.?我们可以在下午6点之后再离开学校吗？ 表示可能性。

That man can‟t be our new teacher.那人不可能是我们的新老师。The exam can‟t be too difficult.考试不会太难。2.bring/ take/carry/fetch

(1)bring一般是指拿来，即从别处往说话人这里拿，翻译成“带来”。

He brought us some good news.他给我们带来了一些好消息。Please don‟t forget to bring your homework tomorrow.明天请别忘了把家庭作业带来。

(2)take一般是指从说话人这里往别处拿，翻译成“带走”。

Please take the umbrella with you.It‟s going to rain.要下雨了，请把伞带上。She took the dictionary away.她把字典拿走了。

(3)carry不强调方向，表示“携带、背着、运送、搬扛”等意思。

They carried the boxes into the factory.他们把箱子搬进了工厂。

A taxi carried them to the station.出租车送他们到了车站

(4)fetch表示的是“去取来、去拿来、去叫来”等意思，包含去和来两趟。

The waiter fetched them some apples.侍者为他们取来了一些苹果。Mother fetched the doctor for her ill son.妈妈为生病的儿子请来了医生。3.whole/ all

(1)whole强调一个完整如一，互不分割的整体。

The whole country is suffering the war.整个国家正遭遇战争。I just want to know the whole story.我仅仅只想知道完整的故事。

whole在句中的位置是放在所有格，冠词和指示代词的之后。

They will spend their whole holiday in Canada.他们将到加拿大渡过整个假期。（所有格后）

She has finished writing the whole book.她已经写完了整本书。（冠词后

whole用来修饰可数名词（名词用单数）。

He ate the whole cake.他把整个蛋糕都吃了。（强调整整一个蛋糕）(2)all强调由一个个部分组成的“全部”。

Miss Green knew all the students in the class.格林小姐认识这个班上的所有人。（一个一个全认识）

all在句中的位置是放在所有格，定冠词和指示代词的之前。

Jim finished all his homework in twenty minutes.吉姆在20分钟之内完成了所有的作业。（所有格前）Of all the boys here, he sings best.在这里所有的男孩之中，他唱的最好。（定冠词前）The boy can answer all these questions.那个男孩能够回答所有的这些问题。（指示代词前）

all既能修饰可数名词（名词须用复数），又能修饰不可数名词。

All these five books are mine.这五本书都是我的。（修饰可数名词）

She was worried about her son all the time.她总在为她的儿子担心。（修饰不可数名词）4.fill/ full

(1)fill常作动词，与with连用，意思是“注满、装满”，也能表示“填空；补缺”的意思。

He filled the box with chalk.他把粉笔装满了盒子。The bucket is filled with water.水桶里装满了水。

(2)full是形容词，翻译成“满的，装满的”，常与of连用。此外还能表示“完全的”和“吃饱的，过饱的”。

All the rooms are full of people.所有的房间都满人了。

The bus was full.He had to wait for the next one.这辆车人满了，他只有等下一辆。5.be made of/ be made from/ be made in/ be made into

(1)be made of表示“由…制成”, 一般指能够看出原材料，或发生的是物理变化。

This table cloth is made of paper.这张桌布是由纸做的。

This salad is made of apples and strawberries.这种沙拉是由苹果和草莓做的。(2)be made from也表示“由…制成”，但一般指看不出原材料，或发生的是化学变化。Bread is made from corn.面包是小麦做的。

The lifeboat is made from some special material.这个救生艇是由某种特殊材料制成的。(3)be made in指的是产地，意思为“于…制造”。The caps are made in Russia.这些帽子产于俄罗斯。

My mother likes to buy things which are made in China.我妈妈喜欢买中国产的东西。(4)be made into的意思为“被制成为…”。

This piece of wood will be made into a small bench.这块木头将要被制成一个小凳。The paper has been made into clothes for the doll.纸被做成了洋娃娃的衣服。6.none/ no one/ neither(1)none既能指人，又能指物，意思是“没有一个，无一”，常用作代词，与of连用。None of us has heard of him before.我们没有一个人以前听说过他。I like none of the coats.那些外套我一件都不喜欢。none用作主语时，谓语动词用单复数皆可。None of the answers is true.没有一个答案是正确的。None of the rooms are mine.没有一间房子是我的。(2)no one只能用来指人，且不能与of连用。No one is absent.没有人缺席。

I knew no one there.那里我一个人也不认识。no one用作主语时，谓语动词只能用单数。No one agrees with you.没有人同意你的说法。(3)neither作代词是对两者都进行否定，意思为“两者都不”，作主语时谓语动词用单数。Neither of the boys is from England.这两个男孩都不是来自英国。I know neither of them.他们两个我都不认识。7.found/ find

(1)find的意思是“找到、发现”，其过去式和过去分词都是found.I can't find my glasses.我找不着我的眼镜了。

He found it boring to sit here alone.他发现独自坐在这里很没劲。

(2)found是另外一个词，与find并没有关系，意思是“成立、建设”，常用作及物动词。

The People's Republic of China was founded in 1949.中华人民共和国成立于1949年。

The school was founded by the local residents.这所学校是由当地居民修建的。8.hear / hear of/ hear from

(1)hear的意思是“听见；听说，得知”，后面能接名词、代词或宾语从句。

We heard the news just a moment ago.我刚听说这个消息。

Can you hear me? 能听见我说话吗？

(2)hear of的意思是“听说”，一般指非直接的听见，而是听别人说的。后不能接宾语从句。

I have never heard of her.我从未听说过她。

They heard of the film long time ago.他们很久以前就听说过这部电影。(3)hear from的意思是“收到来信”，与“听”无关。I often hear from him.我经常收到他的来信。

He hasn't heard from his mother for a long time.他很久没有收到妈妈的信了 9.send/ send for

(1)send意思是“送往，派遣”，还有“发信，寄信”的意思。

The company sent him to study abroad.公司派他到国外学习去了。

Mr.Brown sent her children away.布郎夫人送走了孩子们。(2)send for意思是“召唤；派人去取；派人去拿”，而非本人亲自去。

They have sent for a repairman.他们已经派人去请了一名修理工。

She sent for some flowers.她派了人去买花。10.get to/ arrive/ reach

(1)arrive后不能直接接地点，是一个不及物动词。若表示到达一个相对大的地点，用arrive in;若表示相对小的地点，用arrive at.The delegation will arrive in China at 5:00 p.m.代表团将于下午5:00到达北京。

It was dark when they arrived at the railway station.当他们到达火车站的时候，天已经黑了。

When did she arrive here last time? 她上次是什么时候到这儿的？（副词前省略介词）(2)reach能直接接所到达的地点，是一个及物动词。They reached London on Friday.他们星期五到达了伦敦。The news only reached me yesterday.我于昨天才接到这个消息。reach还有“伸手去取，伸手触及，联络”等意思。

Can you reach that apple on the tree? 你能够到树上的哪个苹果吗？ He can always be reached on the phone.可随时打电话跟他联系。(3)get在表示“到达”时是不及物动词，应与to搭配使用。We often get to school on foot.我们经常步行到学校。They got to the top of the hill at noon.他们于中午到达了山顶。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.动词被动语态的结构和用法； 2.动词不定式的功能和用法； 3.本单元的词汇、短语和句型； 4.本单元学过的交际用语。

初三年级（11-15）

【目录】

Unit 11 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are? Reading: Could you please lend me your pen? Unit 12 You're supposed to shake hands.Reading: You're supposed to write quickly!Unit 13 Rainy days make me sad.Reading: Receiving money makes me uncomfortable.Unit 14 Have you packed yet? Reading: He's already visited the place where his ancestors lived.Unit 15 We're trying to save the manateese!【知识梳理】

I.重点短语 1.beg one's pardon 2.multiply …by… 3.slow down 4.wear out 5.try on

6.make a decision, 7.a place of interest 8.make a mistake 9.drop off

10.think about 11.make up one's mind, 12.at all, 13.at least 14.by the time 15.carry on 16.never mind 17.from now on 18.come down 19.hands up 20.before long，21.no one，22.not…any longer II.重要句型

1.be busy doing sth.2.prefer to do sth.3.regard...as...4.be pleased with sth./sb.5.be angry with sb.III.交际用语

1.---How much does… cost …?

2.---It can cost as little as … yuan and as much as … yuan.3.---It costs ….4.---It's worth ….5.---I don't agree with ….6.---I wasn't sure whether….7.---I wonder if ….8.---What size …?

9.---Have you got any other colour / size / kind? 10.---Have you got anything cheaper? 11.---How much are they? 12.---How much does it cost? 13.---How much is it? 14.---That's a bit expensive.15.---Even though they're a little expensive, I'll take them.16.---I'll think about ….17.---I don't think I'll take ….18.---I like ….19.---I don't really like ….20.---Can I help you, girl?

21.---Would you like me to look in the back? 22.---We can find ….23.---Do you like being …? 24.---Can I ask you some questions? 25.---Sure.26.---It was great.27.---Wow!28.---Yeah!29.---Oh dear!30.---Hands up!

31.---I‟ll shoot anyone who moves.32.---There‟s no need to thank me.33.---Can you remember anything else about him? 34.---Come down, Polly!35.---There is a little traffic accident．

36.---There's a big traffic jam.37.---Well, I'm sure he'll be here before long.38.---I'm beginning to get angry with him!39.---Yes, we can't wait any longer.Let's go without him.40.---That's terrible!

41.---That's a really bad excuse!IV.重要语法 1.过去将来时

2.过去完成时 3.动词不定式 4.定语从句 【名师讲解】

1.think/ think/about/ think of(1)think 单独使用时表示“思考”，接that 宾语从句时意为“认为”，“觉得”。

I am thinking how to work out the problem.I think she is a good student.当宾语从句含有否定概念时，通常形式上否定think，但意义上却是否定宾语从句。I don't think he can come.I don't think it will be windy.(2)think about 可接一个名词，动词-ing 形式或由疑问词引导的不定式或宾语从句，意思是“考虑……”。

I have thought about it for a long time.Please think about how to tell her the bad news.(3)think of 表示“认为”，一般用于疑问句中，与what 连用。

What do you think of the TV play? = How do you like the TV play? 2.big/ large/ great 上述形容词都表示“大”，但侧重点及程度不同。

(1)big指具体事物的大小，强调比正常形体的标准大，既可用在普通场合，也可用在正式场合。它可用来指人的身材高大或“长大了”，还可表示“伟大”，“重要”之意。如：

Can you lift up this big stone? On the last day I made a big decision.(2)large特别强调远远超过标准的大，指体积、面积、容积、数量之大。如： A whale is a large animal.A large crowd collected at the gate of the theatre.(3)great除了表示数量体积之大外，又指抽象的程度，意味着伟大性，重要性，优越性；常用于抽象

或无形的东西；用于有形的东西时，常带有“伟大”，“大得令人吃惊”等意思，含有一定的感情色彩。如：

China is a great country with a long history.He was one of the greatest scientists.3.cost/ take/ spend/ pay

(1)cost表示“花钱”，花费，付出（只能用于钱、精力、生命等；主语必须是物。）

The book cost me five yuan.(2)take的主语是动词不定式, 通常用it做形式主语。It took me five yuan to buy the book..(3)spend，在主动语句中主语是人

I spent five yuan on(for)the book.或I spent five yuan(in)buying the book.(4)pay的主语是人。I paid five yuan for the book.4.expensive/ high/ cheap/ low

这四个词在谈论到价格的高低时，要注意使用。expensive与high涉及到价格“高”，而cheap 与low涉及到价格“低”。

(1)expensive昂贵的，花钱多的。这个单词若谈到“价格高，货贵”时，其主语不能是价格，必须是货物、物品本身。如：

This watch is expensive.这只表很贵。

These glass-products are not expensive.这些玻璃制品不是很值钱。

注意：cheap表示“价廉”，“便宜的”，其主语也不能是价格，必须是物品本身。如： The cheap table was bought from him.这张便宜的桌子是他卖给我们的。This cloth doll is very cheap.这只布娃娃很便宜。

(2)high在表示价格时，含义是“高”，low在表示价格时，含义是“低”，这两个词不能用于物品本身，只 能用在价格上。如：

The price of this watch is very high.这只表的价格太高了。

The price of this book is not low for me.这本书的价格对我来说是不低。下面我们试看几个句子的正误对照： The price of this computer is expensive.(宜改为：This computer is expensive.或The price of this computer is high.)The price of this pen is not cheap for him to buy.(宜改为：This pen is not cheap for him to buy.或 The price of this pen is not low for him.)5.alone/ lonely

lonely 与alone的意思比较接近，但在使用时有所区别：

(1)lonely用作形容词，意思是“孤单的；寂寞的”。可指心灵上的寂寞，也可指偏僻的地点。在句中既可作表语，也可作定语。(2)alone 可作形容词和副词，意思是“单独；独自”，不指心理上寂寞的感觉。She was taken to a lonely island, lived alone, but she never felt lonely.她被带到一个荒岛上，自己居住，但她从不感到寂寞。6.before long/ long before

(1)before long 作“不久以后”讲，切不要按字面译为“长时间以前”或“好久以前”。如： We hope to finish our experiment before long.我们希望不久（以后）就把实验做完。(2)long before 作“很久以前”讲。原意为“……以前很久”，故也可译为“老早”。long before 跟before long

不同，前者在其后面可以接名词或一个从句；当上下文明确时，名词或从句还可以省略。Before long 则没有上述搭配用法。

They began the test yesterday, but we had made experiment long before.我们昨天开始做实验，但我们在那以前很久就已经做准备了。7.as/ when/ while(1)as 是连词，意思是“当……的时候，一面……一面”，（强调同时，一般连续时间不长），如：

As we were talking about Titanic, our teacher came in.正当我们谈论“泰坦尼克号”这部电影时，教师进来了。The students sing as they go along.学生们边走边唱。

(2)When和as一样都是连词，注意它们的不同。如when“当……的时候”（一般表示动作紧接着发生）；

“那时”（等立连词，前有逗号分开）

I stayed till sunset, when it began to rain.我一直呆到太阳下山，那时天开始下雨了。(3)while是“当……时候；和……同时”（强调同时发生，一般连续时间较长）While I was watching TV, he was reading.当我在看电视的时候，他正在看书。While there is life, there is hope.有生命就有希望。

8.beat/win/ hit

(1)beat 是动词，意思是“连续地打;打败;敲打”。beat后可接人或队名。意思是“击败对手。”如：

I can beat you at swimming.(2)win意思是“赢得某个项目”，后面常接“match, game”。如： He won a game.他胜一局。We won a match.我们比赛得胜。

(3)hit意思是“击中”（有时可表示“打一下”）。如：

The mother hit her child out of anger.妈妈生气，打了她孩子一下。9.keep doing/keep on doing(1)keep doing侧重表示“持续不停地做某事”或“持续某种状态”。如：

The girl kept crying all the time.那个女孩一直在哭。

The baby kept sleeping about four hours.这个婴儿连续睡了大约四个小时。

(2)keep on doing 表示“总不断做某事”，不表示静止状态。不能与sitting, sleeping, lying, standing这类 词连用。如：

It kept on raining for seven days.Don't keep on asking such silly questions.10.get/ turn/ become

这三个词都可作系动词用，表示状态的变化，后跟表语，但三个词的用法稍有不同。get强调情感、气候和环境的变化；turn强调色彩的变化；而become则强调职务、职称等的变化。如：

The days are getting shorter and shorter in winter．冬天的白天越来越短。

She couldn't answer the question and her face turned red．她回答不出问题，脸红了。When did you become a teacher?-Ten years ago.你什么时候当的老师？十年前。11.steal / rob 从意思上讲steal表示偷窃的意思。而rob表示抢劫的意思；从搭配上来讲，steal sth from sb/sth;而rob则用rob sb/sth of sth;例如：

He stole money from the rich to give it to the poor.They robbed the bank of one million dollars.12.see/look/watch/notice 在英语中，see，look，watch，notice都有“看”的意思，要注意他们的区别。see意为“看到”，表示视觉器官有意识或无意识地看到物体，强调“看到”的结果。look意为“看”，表示有意识地观看，强调“看”的动作。watch意为“观看，注视”，指以较大的注意力观看。

notice意为“看到，注意到”，指有意识的注意，含有从不注意到注意的变化的意义。例如：

What can you see in the picture？在图画中你能看到什么？ Look!How happily they are playing！看！他们玩得多高兴啊！He‟s watched TV for over two hours．他看了两个多小时的电视。He noticed a purse lying on the road．他注意到地上有个钱包。13.Shoot/ shoot at shoot是及物动词，意思是“射中，射死”，宾语多为人或动物等。而shoot at是一个动词词组，意为“向……射击”，至于射中或射死与否不得而知。如：

The man shot five birds in the forest．那个人在森林里射死（中）了五只鸟。The hunter shot at the bear．猎人朝熊射击了。

They shot at the she－wolf，but didn't shoot her．他们向那只母狼射击，但是没有射中／死。14.escape/ run away(1)escape作“逃跑”、“逃脱”或“逃避”讲时，往往会有成功之意。如： The old man escaped death．那个老人死里逃生。The thief escaped from prison．那个小偷越狱了。

(2)run away作“逃跑”、“跑走”讲时，往往强调动作。如： Don't let him run away． 别让他跑了。口语中escape和run away可以互用。15.so that..../ so...that....(1)so that....为了，以便。引导一个目的状语从句，从句中往往有情态动词。也可引导一个结果状语从句。如：

I left at 5:00 so that I could catch the early bus.Speak loudly, so that they can hear what you say.He didn't study English so that he lost a chance to work in a foreign company.(2)so...that....既可引导一个结果状语从句，也可引导一个目的状语从句。如：The classroom was so noisy that I could hardly study.I got up so early in the morning that I could catch the train.【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在： 1.过去将来时；

2.过去完成时； 3.动词不定式； 4.定语从句；

第五篇：中考九年级英语上全程知识点总结及练习(含答案).doc

初三年级（上）【知识梳理】

I.重点短语

1.at the moment

2.used to 3.for a while

4.walk away with sth.5.leave for some place 6.sooner or later 7.pay for

8.come up with an idea 9.think of 10.have a try

11.all over the world 12.be famous for 13.large numbers of 14.all the year round 15.no matter what 16.give up 17.for example 18.by the way 19.on business 20.so far 21.come true 22.set off 23.slow down 24.go on doing 25.wait for 26.be proud of 27.be afraid of 28.speak highly of 29.a year and a half 30.half a year 31.pick up 32.as soon as 33.keep… clean 34.take care of 35.cut down

36.make a contribution to 37.base on 38.make sure 39.take away 40.begin with 41.right now 42.as soon as possible 43.leave a message 44.all kinds of things

45.walk around 46.fall asleep 47.wake up 48.go on a trip

49.have a good time 50.take photos 51.come out 52.come on

53.have a family meeting 54.talk about

55.go for a holiday 56 go scuba diving 57.write down 58.by oneself 59.walk along

60.get a chance to do sth 61.have a wonderful time 62.book a room

63.have an accident 64.be interested in 65.use sth.to do sth.66.make a TV show 67.be amazed at 68.take part in 69.feed on 70.get out of II.重要句型

1.Why don’t you do sth.?

2.make sb.Happy

3.borrow sth.from sb.4.forget to do sth.5.pay fro sth.6.return sth.To sb.7.learn sth.from sb.8.be famous for sth.9.No matter what…

10.be with sb.11.go on doing sth.12.speak highly of sb.13.keep doing sth.14.allow sb.To do sth.15.encourage sb.to do sth.16.It is said that… III.交际用语

1.---Excuse me, have you got …?---Yes, I have.(Sorry, I haven’t.)2.---Why don’t you …?---Thanks, I will.用心 爱心 专心

3.---Thanks a lot.(Thank you very much.)---You are welcome.4.---Have you ever done…?

---Yes, I have, once.(No, never.)5.---I’ve just done…---Really? 6.---What’s …like ?

7.---How long have you been…?---Since…

8.---Have you ever been to…?

---I’ve never been there.(None of us has./ Only …has.)

9.---Would you like to have a try?---I don’t think I can…

10.---What have you done since…?

11.---How long have you been at this …?---For…

12.---How long has she/ he worked there…?

---She’s / He’s worked there for… / all her / his life.13.---I’m sorry he isn’t here right now.14.---May I help you? 15.---That’s very kind of you.16.---Could we go scuba diving? 17.---Could you tell us how long we’re going to be away? 18.---Let’s try to find some information about it, OK? 19.---Could you please tell me how to search the Internet? 20.---Go straight along here.21.---Please go to Gate 12.22.---Please come this way.23.---Could you tell me what you think about Hainan Island? 24.---That sounds really cool!IV.重要语法 1.宾语从句

2.现在完成时

3.一般过去时与现在完成时的用法比较： 【名师讲解】 1.Maybe/ may be

(1)maybe是副词，意思是“大概，也许”，常用作状语。

Maybe you put it in your bag.也许你把它放在包里了。

“Will he come tomorrow?”“Maybe not.” “他明天来吗？”“也许不”。

(2)may be相当于是情态动词may与be动词搭配一起作谓语，意思是“也许是…，可能是…”。

It may be 9:00 when they arrive.他们可能于九点到达。

The man may be a lawyer.那人也许是律师。2.borrow/ lend/ keep/ use

(1)borrow表示的是从别人那里借来东西，即我们通常所说的“借进来”。

We often borrow books from our school library.我们经常从学校图书馆借书。

I borrowed this dictionary from my teacher.我从老师那儿借来了这本字典。

borrow是一个瞬间完成的动作，因此不能与时间段连用。

You can borrow my recorder for three days.(错误)

I have borrowed this book for only one week.(错误)

(2)lend表示的是把自己的东西借给别人，即我们通常所说的“借出去”。

Thank you for lending me your bike.谢谢你把自行车借给我。

He often lends money to his brother.他经常借钱给他弟弟。

lend与borrow一样，也是一个瞬间完成的 动作，不能与一段时间连用。

(3)keep的意思也是“借”，但一般是指借来后的保存或使用阶段，是一段持续的时间，因此可以与时 间段连用。

You can keep my recorder for three days.我的录音机你可以借用三天。

I have kept this book for only one week.这本书我才刚借了一星期。

(4)use也可以当“借用”讲，但它的本意是“用，使用”。

用心 爱心 专心 May I use your ruler? 我能借你的尺子用一下吗？

He had to use this public telephone.他不得不使用这部公用电话。3.leave/ leave for

(1)leave意思是“离开，留下”。

We left Shanghai two years ago.我们两年前离开了上海。

He left his cell phone in the taxi last week.他上周把手机落在出租车里了。

(2)leave for意思是“前往”，表示要去的目的地。We will leave for Tibet next month.我们将于下月去西藏。

The train is leaving for Moscow.这趟火车即将开往莫斯科。4.since/ for

(1)since用于完成时态，既能用作介词，也能用作连词，后常接时间点，意思是“自从”。

He has been a worker since he came into this city.自从他来到这个城市，他就是工人了。

I have never seen him since we last met in Shanghai.自从我们上次在上海见过之后，我再也没见过他。

since作连词，还有“既然”的意思。

Since you are interested in it, just do it.既然你对它感兴趣，那就做吧。

You can have fun now since you’ve finished your work.既然你已经做完了功课，就开心玩会儿吧。

(2)for用于完成时，用作介词，后常接一段时间，意思是“经过…”。

I have learned English for five years.我已经学了五年英语了。

They have waited for you for 30 minutes.他们已经等了你三十分钟了。

for也可以用作连词，但意思是“因为”。

They missed the flight for they were late.他们由于完到了而误了航班。

He fell ill for many reasons.他由于多种原因病倒了。

5.neither/ either/ both

(1)neither作代词是对两者都进行否定，意思为“两者都不”，作主语时谓语动词用单数.Neither of the boys is from England.这两个男孩都不是来自英国。

I know neither of them.他们两个我都不认识。

neither用作形容词，也修饰单数名词，意思与作代词时相同；用作连词时，一般与nor搭配，表示 “既不…也不”。作主语时，谓语动词也遵循就近原则。

She neither ate nor drank yesterday.她昨天既不吃也不喝。

Neither he nor we play football on Sundays.他和我们星期天都不踢球。

(2)either作代词时，是指两者中的任意一方,(两者之)每一个，故作主语时谓语动词用单数.Either of the books is new.这两本书任何一本都是新的.She doesn’t like either of the films.这两部电影她都不喜欢.either作形容词, 用来修饰单数名词,意思与作介词时相同.Either school is near my home.(这两所学校中的)任何一所学校都离我家很近.Either question is difficult.两个问题(中的任何一个)都难.either作连词时,一般与or搭配,表示两者选其一，意思是“不是…就是”。作主语时，谓语动词遵循就近原则。

Either he or I am right.不是他就是我是对的。Either my sister or my parents are coming to see me.不是我姐姐就是我父母要来

看我。

(3)both作代词时，指的是所涉及到的“两者都”, 故作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。

I like both of the stories.这两个故事我都喜欢。Both of my parents are teachers.我父母两人都是老师。

用心 爱心 专心 both作形容词时，用来修饰两者,意思与作代词时相同.Both his arms are hurt.他的两只胳膊都受伤了。Both these students are good at English.这两个学生都擅长英语。

both用作连词时，多与and搭配，表示“既…又, 不仅…而且”, 作主语时,谓语动词仍用复数形式。

Both piano and violin are my bobbies.钢琴和小提琴都是我的爱好。

They study both history and physics.他们既学历史，又学物理。

6.find/look for/ find out

(1)find强调找的结果，意思是“找到”。此外还有“发现，发觉”的意思，后可接宾语从句。

Jim couldn’t find his hat.吉姆找不着帽子了。Have you found your lost keys? 你找到丢失的钥匙了吗？

He found the lights were on along the street.他发现沿街的灯都亮了

(2)look for的意思为“寻找”，指的是找的动作而非结果。另外，还有“盼望，期待”的意思。

She is looking for her son.她正在找她的儿子。We’ve been looking for the car since early this morning.我们从今天一大早就开始找这辆车了。I look for the coming holiday.我期待着即将来临的假期。

(3)find out含有经过观察、研究或探索而得知的意思，后常接较抽象的事物，意思是“找出，发现，查明（真相）”等。

I can find out who took my money away.我能查出谁拿了我的钱。

Could you find out when the plane arrives? 你能设法知道飞机何时到吗？

7.forget to do/ forget doing

(1)forget to do是指忘记去做某件事了，即该事还没有做。

Please don’t forget to call this afternoon.今天下午不要忘了给我打电话。

I forgot to take some small change with me.我身上忘了带零钱了。

(2)forget doing是指忘记某件已经做过的事情，即该事已经做了，但被忘记了。

He forgot telling me his address.他忘了告诉过我地址了。

They forgot having been here before.他们忘了以前曾来过这儿。8.stop doing/ stop to do

(1)stop doing是指停止做某事，即doing这个动作不再继续。

They stopped debating.他们停止了辩论。（不辩论了）

He had to stop driving as the traffic lights changed in to red.由于交通灯变成了红色，他不得不停车。

(2)stop to do是指停下来开始做另一件事，即停止原先的事，开始做do这个动作。

She stopped to have a rest.她停下来休息会儿。（开始休息）

They stopped to talk.他们停下来开始交谈。9.except/ besides

(1)except是指不包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“撇开…不谈”,表示两部分的不同。

Everyone is excited except me.除我以外的每个人都很激动。（他们激动，而我却不激动）

All the visitors are Japanese except him.除他以外的所有游客都是日本人。（其他人是日本人，可他不是）

(2)besides是包括后面所提人或物在内的“除了”，可以理解为“除之外…还、除之外…又”，表示两部分 的相似性。

Twenty-five students went to the cinema besides him.除他以外，还有25个学生去看了电影。(他和另外25人都去了)

用心 爱心 专心 We like biology besides English.除了英语外，我们还喜欢生物。（生物和英语都喜欢）

besides还可用作副词，意思是“此外；而且”，常用于句首或句尾。

He is a great thinker, and besides, he is a politician.他是一名伟大的思想家，除此以外，他还是一位政治家。

They encouraged me, and they supported me with money, besides.他们不仅鼓励我，而且与我以金钱上的支持。

10.keep doing/ keep on doing

(1)keep doing指的是连续地、坚持不断地做某事，中间不间断。

It kept blowing for a whole day.刮了一整天风了。

The temperature keeps dropping.温度持续下降。(2)keep on doing是指反复坚持做某事，但动作之间略有间隔。

They have kept on writing to each other for many years.他们已经互相通信多年了。

After drinking some water, he kept on talking.喝了一些水后，他坚持讲话。11.seem/ look

(1)seem一般着重于以客观迹象为依据，意思是“似乎、好象、看起来…”。

The baby seems to be happy.婴儿看上去似乎很高兴。

He seemed to be sorry for that.他似乎为那件事感到抱歉。seem能与to do结构连用，而look不能。

It seems to rain.似乎要下雨了。

They seemed to have finished their work.他们似乎已经完成了工作。

在it作形式主语的句型中只能用seem。

It seems that he is quite busy now.他现在看起来很忙。

It seems to us that there is nothing serious.在我看来没什么大不了的。

(2)look用作“看起来；好像”时，常从物体的外观或样貌上来判断，是以视觉所接受的印象为依据的。

The room looks clean.这间房看起来很干净。The girl looks like her mother.那女孩看起来向她的妈妈。12.such/ so

(1)such常用作形容词，用来修饰名词。

Don’t be such a fool.别这么傻。

He is such a clever boy.他是如此聪明的一个男孩。

(2)so是副词，用来修饰形容词或副词。

He is so kind!他真好心！

Why did you come so late? 你为何回来得如此晚？ 当名词前有many, much, few, little等表示多、少时，应该用so。

He has so many friends.他有如此多的朋友。

Only so little time is left!才剩这么一点儿时间！13.either/ too/ also

(1)either用作“也”时是副词，常用于否定句句尾。She is not a Japanese, I’m not, either.她不是日本人，我也不是。

My sister doesn’t like this song, either.我妹妹也不喜欢这首歌。

(2)too常用于肯定句或疑问句尾，表示“也”。He likes China, too.他也喜欢中国。Are you in Grade 3, too? 你也在三年级吗？(3)also也常用于肯定句或疑问句，但一般位于句中。

We are also students.我们也是学生。He also went there on foot.他也是走着去的。Did you also want to have a look? 你也想看看吗？

14.if/ whether

在下列情况下只能用whether而非if：

(1)与or not连用时，只能用whether.We want to know whether you are ill or not.我们想知道你是否生病了。

用心 爱心 专心 Please tell me whether or not you have finished your work.请告诉我们你是否完成了工作。(2)后接动词不定式时，只能用whether.Adam didn’t know whether to go or stay.亚当不知道是走还是留。

He hasn’t decided whether to have dinner with me.他还没决定是否和我共进晚

餐。

(3)所引导的宾语从句放在主句之前时，只能用whether.Whether it will rain or snow, we don’t mind.我们不在乎将要刮风还是下雨。

Whether I won or lost, she didn’t want to know.我是赢是输她不想知道。

(4)引导主语从句或表语从句时，一般用whether.The most important was whether they had gone.最重要的是他们是不是已经

走了。

Whether he will go with me is a secret.他是否会和我一起去还是个秘密。

if能引导条件状语从句，表示“如果，假如”，而whether没有此用法。

We’ll have a football match if it doesn’t rain tomorrow.如果明天不下雨，我们

要进行足球赛。

I’ll tell him if I sees him.我看见他就告诉他。If you’re in danger, please call 110.如果你遇到危险，请拨打110。15.cost/ spend/ pay/ take

(1)cost一般用某物来做主语，表示“（某物）值…、花费…”，既能指花费时

间也能指金钱。

The new bike costs me 300 yuan.这辆新自行车花了我三百元。

It will cost you a whole to read through this book.通读这本书将会花费你整整 一周时间。

cost 还可以用作名词，表示“成本、费用、价格、代价”等。

What’s the cost of this TV set? 这台电视机的成本是多少钱？

They succeeded at the cost of hard work.他们辛苦地工作换来的成功。

(2)spend一般用某人来作主语，表示“（某人）花费…，付出…”，也能指时间或金钱，指时间时常与 in搭配，指金钱时常与on或for搭配。

We spent two days in repairing this machine.我们花了两天时间修理这台机器。

Mr.Lee spends $20 on books every month.李先生每月花二十美元在书上。

(3)pay用作动词时，一般也以某人作主语，但一般指花钱、付款等，很少用来指花费时间。常与for搭配使用。

They paid 70 yuan for the tickets.他们花了七十元买票。

He was too poor to pay for his schooling.他穷得交不起学费。

pay还可以用作名词，意思为“薪水、工资”等。It’s hard for me to live with such low pay.我很难靠这么低的薪水生活下去。

(4)take也指“花费(时间、金钱)”，但通常用某事、某物做主语，或用形式主语it.How long will the meeting take? 会议要开多久？

It took me several hours to get there.我花了几个小时才到那儿。16.bad/ badly

这两个词的意思含有“坏、糟、严重”等意思，且它们有共同的比较级worse和最高级worst。

(1)bad是一个形容词，意思是“坏的，糟糕的，差的，严重的”。

I don’t think he is a bad person.我并不认为他是一个坏人。

I had a bad headache.我的头疼得很厉害。

用心 爱心 专心(2)badly是一个副词，意思是“不好地，差”，也可以表示程度，意为“严重地，非常，极度”。

We need help badly.我们急需帮助。

His arm was badly hurt.他的胳膊严重受伤了。17.interested/ interesting

(1)interested是指“对…产生兴趣的，对…感兴趣的”，一般用人做主语，后常用介词in.He was interested in biology before.他以前对生物感兴趣。

I’m not interested in art.我对艺术不感兴趣。(2)interesting的意思是“有趣的”，指能够给人带来兴趣的某人或某事物。

He is an interesting old man.他是个有趣的老头。The interesting story attracted me.这个有趣的故事吸引了我。18.dead/ die/ death/ dying

(1)dead是形容词，意思为“死了的、无生命的”，表示状态，可以与一段时间连用。

The tree has been dead for ten years.这棵树死了有十年了。

The rabbits are all dead.这些兔子都是死的。(2)die是动词，意思为“死、死亡”，是一个瞬间动词，不能与一段时间连用。

My grandpa died two years ago.我爷爷两年前去世了。

The old man died of cancer.老人死于癌症。(3)death是名词，意思为“死亡、去世”等。

The memorial hall was built one year after his death.他死后一年，纪念馆建成了。

His death is a great loss to us.他的死是我们的巨大损失。

(4)dying 是die的现在分词，用作形容词，意思是“垂死的、即将死去的”。

The doctors have saved the dying man.医生们救活了那个垂死的人。

The poor dog had no food, it was dying.可怜的狗没有食物,快要饿死了。【考点扫描】

中考考点在本单元主要集中在：

1.宾语从句的时态和语序；

2.一般过去时和过去完成时的用法区别； 3.本单元学过的词汇、短语和句型； 4.本单元学习的日常交际用语。考试形式可以是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。

【中考范例】

1.（2004年北京市海淀区中考试题）

---Do you know ________________?---Only ten months old.A.when does Tiger Woods start golfing B.when did Tiger Woods start golfing C.when Tiger Woods starts golfing D.when Tiger Woods started golfing

【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是宾语从句的时态和语序。这个宾语从句的时态应用一般过去时，应为这里说的是过去的事情。语序应用陈述句的语序，所以正确答案是: when Tiger Woods started golfing。2.（2004年北京市海淀区中考试题）

I’m interested in animals, so I _____________ every Saturday working in an animal hospital.A.pay B.get C.take D.spend

【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是pay, get, take和spend这四个动词的用法区别。只有动词spend可以用在sb.spends time doing sth.这个句型里，所以正确答案影视spend。

3.（2004年天津市中考试题）

Could I ________ your telephone? I have

something important to tell my parents.A.keep B.borrow C.use D.lend

【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是keep, borrow, use和lend四个动词的用法区别。keep的真正含义是“保留”，borrow的含义是“借入”，lend的含义是“借出”，只有use的含义是“使用”。在这个句子里实际上是“使用”的意思，所以应选use。4.（2004年鄂州市中考试题）

---Hi, Ann.Where’s your brother? I need his help.---He left home two weeks ago and ________away

ever since.A.is B.was C.has been D.had been

【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是动词时态的用法区别。一般现在时表示经常发生的动作或现在所处的状态；一般过去时表示过去的动作或过去所处的状态；过去完成时表示过去的动作或过去的时间以前发生的事情；现在完成时表示动作或状态从过去某一时间开始一直延续到现在或刚刚结束。这里只能用现在完成时。

用心 爱心 专心 【满分演练】 一.单项填空

1.Mr Green asked the children to _____the words in the dictionary.A.look at B.look up C.look for D.look after 2.May I _____ your bike? Certainly, but you can't _____it to other.A.lend, lend B.borrow, lend C.borrow, borrow D.lend, borrow 3.Mr Brown _____in China since 20 years ago.A.worked B.works C.is working D.has worked 4.There______ be many trees here two years ago.A.is B.are C.use to D.used to 5.Neither my brother nor I ____a doctor.A.is B.am C.are D.be 6.____of my parents ____ watching TY.A.Both, likes B.Either, like C.Neither, like D.Neither, likes 7.I really don't know ____ next.Can you tell me ?

A.how to do B.what to do C.how will I do it D.what to do it

8.He has lived here ___ 1965.A.since B.for C.in D.from 9.If you are tired, please stop ___ a rest.A.having B.have C.to have D.has 10.She has never come to the farm before, _____ she? A.has B.hasn't C.does D.doesn't 11.It is ____book that I have ____ it twice.A.such an interesting…seen B.so an interesting…read C.so interesting…looked D.such an interesting…read

12.The doctor was busy ____ on the boy at that time.A.operate B.to operate C.operated D.operating 13.The policeman told the children _____play in the street.A.didn't B.to not C.not to D.don't 14.Mother returned home _____earlier than Father that evening.A.very B.too C.more D.much 15.I won't go to see the film tonight, because I ______ my ticket．

A.lost B.have lost C.will lose D.didn't lose

二.完形填空

Children like to copy(模仿)what they hear.They copy their parents，their friends and even the TV.This teaches them how to speak the language.Copying also does good to students of a second ____1______.When you listen to foreigners speak English，_____2_____ what they say as loudly as you can.

Children don’t practise grammar, but use the language to ____3_____ that interests them.They don’t ____4_____ their vocabulary or poor grammar.They find ways to ____5_____ themselves，and they do it successfully.

Students of English should also pay their attention to ______6______.Look for chances to talk with people in English.If you can’t find a ____7____ to talk to, talk with other students of English instead._____8_____ an English discussion and talk about music, movies or whatever _____9_____you.Don’t worry about _____10___.The objective(目标)is to earn how to communicate(交流)easily and comfortably.Remember that you can communicate successfully even with a small vocabulary.

1.A.year

B.grade

C.language D.country 2.A.repeat B.hear C.believe D.remember

3.A.write letters B.keep diaries C.talk to people D.talk about things

4.A.look for B.complain about C.laugh at D.go over 5.A.enjoy B.help C.relax D.express

6.A.grammar

B.vocabulary

C.communication D.English

7.A.foreigner B.topic C.chance D.visitor

8.A.Start B.Build C.Use D.Make

9.A.understands

B.interests

C.improves D.allows

10.A.lessons B.exams C.wasting time D.making mistakes 三.阅读理解

(A)

We can see walls everywhere in the world.But the Great Wall of China is the

用心 爱心 专心 biggest of all.The Chinese call it “The Ten-thousand-Li Great Wall”.It is in fact

more than 6,000 kilometres long.It is 4-5 metres wide.In most places, five horses or ten men can walk side by side.When you visit the Great Wall, you can't help wondering how the Chinese

people were able to build such a great wall thousands of years ago.Without any modern machine, it was really very difficult to build it.They had to do all the work by hand.It took millions of men hundreds of years to build it.The Great Wall has a history of over two thousand years.The kings began to build the first parts of it around two thousand seven hundred years ago.Then Qin Shihuang had all the walls joined up.He thought that could keep the enemy out of the country.Today the Great Wall has become a place of interest.Not only Chinese people but also people from all over the world come to visit it.1.The Great Wall is the biggest of all walls in _________.A.China B.Europe C.the world D.Asia(亚洲)2.How long is the Great Wall?

A.It's less than six hundred kilometres.B.It's over six million kilometres.C.It's six thousand kilometres.D.It's more than six thousand kilometres.3.It took _____ men ______ years to build the Great Wall.A.millions;millions

B.hundreds of;hundreds of

C.millions of;hundreds of

D.hundreds of;millions of

4.The Great Wall was built ______________.A.by people all over the world

B.without any modern machines

C.with some other countries' help D.by all Chinese kings

5.Qin Shihuang thought the Great Wall could _________.A.keep the enemy out of his country B.keep his body in it

C.be visited by all the people

D.make his country beautiful

(B)

In 776 B.C.the first Olympic Games were held at the foot of Mount Olympus to honor Greeks' chief god, Zeus(向希腊主要神祗宙斯献礼).The Greeks praised(注重)physical fitness and strength in their education of youth.Therefore, running, boxing, horse-racing, discus throwing and so on were held in each city and the winners competed every four years at Mount Olympus.Winners were greatly honored by having olive wreaths(橄榄枝花环)placed on their heads and having poems sung about their deeds.Originally(起初)these were held as games of friendship, and any wars that were going on were stopped to allow the games.The Greeks regarded these games as so important that they counted time in four-year cycles called “Olympiads” dating from 776 B.C.1.Which of the following is NOT true?

A.The first Olympic Games were held to celebrate.B.Winners were greatly honored by having olive wreaths placed on their heads.C.Battles were stopped to let the games take place.D.Poems were sung in the honor of winners.2 Nearly how many years ago did these games start? A.776 years.B.1250 years.C.2278 years.D.2760 years.3.Which of the following matches was not mentioned in the passage ?

A.Discus throwing B.Boxing C.Skating D.Running

4.What conclusion can we reach about the ancient Greeks ?

A.They liked to fight.B.They were very good at sports.用心 爱心 专心 C.They liked a lot of ceremony(仪式).D.They couldn't count, so that they used “Olympiads” for dates.(C)Over thirty thousand years ago people from northern Asia went to America.Today, we call these people Indians.The Indians went to America because the weather began to change.Northern Asia became very cold.Everything froze.They had to move or die.How did the first Indians go to America? They walked!

Later Columbus found the New World in 1492.At first, only a few Europeans followed.They traveled to America in boats.For the next three hundred years, about 500,000 people went there.Then the number grew very quickly.From 1815 to 1915, over thirty-two million Europeans left their countries and went to the United States.The biggest groups were from Germany and Italy.These Europeans spoke many different languages.Most of them took almost no money.They went to America so that they could find a better life.1.__________ went to America first.A.People from northern Asia B.People from Europe C.People from Germany D.Columbus 2.Why did the Indians go to America? Because ________.A.northern Asia became very hot B.northern Asia became very cold C.they were interested in America D.they liked traveling 3.The New World was ___________.A.Italy B.northern Asia C.Germany D.America 4.The first Europeans went to America _______________.A.by ship B.by bike C.by boat D.by train 5.These Europeans ______________.A.didn't speak the same language

B.spoke English only C.spoke German only

D.spoke both English and German 6.The Europeans went to America in order to _________.A.find the New World B.find a better life C.build more boats D.learn English

四.补全对话: 给下面对话的空白处填上适当的词，使对话通顺，符合逻辑。

(Jim and Han Li are talking about the coming summer holiday.)

Ben:

Hello, Han li, where are you going for your summer holiday?

Han Li: I'm ___1___ sure.I'm thinking ___2___ going to Guilin.What about you?

Ben:

I'm going to Chongqing and Wuhan ___3___ my parents.Han Li: ___4___ are you going there? Ben:

First we'll fly to Wuhan, and then go to Chongqing ___5___ ship.Han Li: That's a good idea.I'm sure you'll enjoy it.Wish you a pleasant journey!Ben:

Thank you!

五.完成句子: 根据汉语句子的意思，完成下列英语句子。

1.你为什么把收音机开这么大声？

______ do you turn your radio so loud _____ ? 2.整个会议将持续3个小时。

The whole meeting will ______ ______ 3 hours.3.我们都喜欢跟那只小狗玩。

We all like ______ ______ with the dog.4.很抱歉，我没有带食物。

I'm sorry, I don't ______ any food ______ me.5.你的新录音机是什么样？

What ______ your new recorder ______ ? 6.谢谢你告诉我这个消息。

Thank you ______ ______ me the news.用心 爱心 专心 7.昨晚他们直到十一点才停止谈话。

They ______ stop talking ______ 11 o'clock last night.8.这是一封露茜写给小帆的信。

This is a letter ______ Lucy ______ Xiaofan.初三年级（上）【练习答案】

一.1.B 2.B 3D 4.D 5.B 6.D 7.B 8.A 9.C 10.A 11.D 12.D 13.C 14.D 15.B 二.1.C 2.A 3.D 4.B 5.D 6.C 7.A 8.A 9.B 10.D 三.(A)1.C 2.C 3.C 4.B 5.A

(B)1.A 2.C 3.C 4.B

(C)1.A 2.B 3.D 4.C 5.A 6.B 四.1.not 2.about 3.with 4.How 5.by 五.1.What, for 2.last for 3.playing with 4.take, with 5.is like 6.for telling 7.didn't, until 8.from, to

用心爱心 专心